Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual PDF

1 of 301
1 of 301

Summary of Content for Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual PDF

A LT

EA F

R EE

TR AC

K O

W N

ER S

M A

N U

A L

In gl

s 5

P8 01

20 03

EC (0

7. 10

) (

G T9

)

A LT

EA F

R EE

TR AC

K In

gl s

( 07

.1 0)

5P 80

12 00

3E C

Portada Freetrack.qxd:Maquetacin 1 23/7/10 08:30 Pgina 3

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.09.10

Portada Freetrack_interior.qxd:maquetacin 23/7/10 08:32 Pgina 3

efully to familiarise yourself with

ill help preserve its value.

s and part replacements.

, as it should be kept with the

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 1 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Foreword This Instruction Manual and its corresponding supplements should be read car

your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling w

For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modification

If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board documentation to the new owner

vehicle.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 2 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Contents 3

shtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical

ockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

irst-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher

uggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

onditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

eating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

limatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

teering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

afety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

tarting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .

anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

utomatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox*

andbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

arking aid acoustic system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ruise control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ctical Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

rakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS

BS and TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lectronic Stability Programme (ESP)* . . . . . . . .

ing and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

unning-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . .

conomical and environmentally friendly driving

riving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

149

152

153

156

156

158

162

166

168

168

169

170

171

174

175

180

182

183

187

187

187

188

189

195

195

196

197

200

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 3 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Contents

Manual structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .

Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel menus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sliding/tilting sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seats and storage compartments . . . . . . . . . .

The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . .

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A

s

F

L

Air c

H

C

2

G

Driv

S

S

Ig

S

M

A

H

P

C

Pra

Inte

B

A

(A

E

Driv

R

E

E

D

5

6

7

7

7

10

16

17

19

19

21

24

28

30

30

34

37

41

44

46

46

48

51

55

55

55

57

60

67

76

88

88

89

93

96

96

102

104

106

108

110

112

115

115

123

125

126

130

133

133

134

136

138

140

Contents4

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 4 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instructions to follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ball coupling of towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . .

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle exterior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories, parts replacement and

modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mobile phones and two-way radios . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . .

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . .

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tyre repair kit (Tyre Mobility System)* . . . . . . . .

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . .

Description of specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 PS) without

Start&Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (211 PS) Front-wheel

drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (211 PS) All-wheel

drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) DPF

with/without Start&Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 103 kW (140 PS) DPF All-

wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 125 kW (170 PS) DPF All-

wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

201

201

202

202

203

205

205

206

212

214

214

214

215

215

216

216

217

218

219

222

226

228

232

233

236

236

244

244

246

253

255

259

268

271

275

275

275

277

277

279

279

280

281

282

283

285

286

288

289

Manual structure 5

Manual structure What you should know before reading this manual This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the

vehicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will

not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the ALTEA FREETRACK, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model or model year; they may vary or be modi- fied depending on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the

equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual

refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when

otherwise indicated.

The equipment marked with an asterisk** is fitted as standard only in certain

versions, and is only supplied as optional extras for some versions, or are

only offered in certain countries.

All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright symbol

does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

The section is continued on the following page.

Marks the end of a section.

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain information on safety. They warn you about possible dangers of accident or injury.

Caution Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to

your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information on the protec-

tion of the environment.

Note Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 5 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Content6

Content This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organised

way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong to

chapters (e.g. Air conditioning). The entire manual is divided into five large

parts which are:

1. Safety First Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat

belts, airbags, seats, etc.

2. Operating instructions Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your

vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit-

able climate in the passenger compartment, etc.

3. Practical Tips Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and

certain problems you can solve yourself.

4. Technical Specifications Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.

5. Alphabetic index At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help

you to rapidly find the information you require.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 6 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Safe driving 7

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

s a part of the occupant protection

the risk of injury in the event of acci-

afety of your passengers in danger. In the event

ipment may reduce the risk of injury. The

f the safety equipment in your SEAT:

e front and rear side seats,

nt seats,

r the front seats,

eat backrests.

ts*,

s for child seats in the rear side seats with the

straints,

e position and non-use position

n.

ned above works together to provide you and

t possible protection in the event of an accident.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 7 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Safety First

Safe driving

Brief introduction

Dear SEAT Driver

Safety first!

This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and

warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety

and for your passengers safety.

WARNING

This manual contains important information about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the owners manual also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.

Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.

Safety equipment

The safety equipment i

system and can reduce

dent.

Never put your safety or the s

of an accident, the safety equ

following list includes most o

three-point seat belts,

belt tension limiters for th

belt tensioners for the fro

belt height adjustment fo

front airbags,

side airbags in the front s

curtain airbags,

active front head restrain

ISOFIX anchorage point

ISOFIX system,

height-adjustable head re

head restraints with in-us

adjustable steering colum

The safety equipment mentio

your passengers with the bes

Safe driving8

gers in the rear seats always have the

-use position page 14

adjust the head restraints according to

propriate child seats and properly

age 46.

ing position. Instruct your passengers

r sitting position. page 10.

curely. Instruct your passengers also to

roperly. page 19.

ety?

determined by your driving style and

of all occupants.

sible for yourself and your passengers.

r driving safety is affected by any circum-

self as well as others on the road ,

traffic and do not get distracted by

e calls.

riving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-

d speed limits.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 8 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

However, these safety systems can only be effective if you and your passen-

gers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment properly.

Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so important,

how it protects you, what you have to consider when using it and how you and

your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the safety

equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you and your

passengers should note in order to reduce the risk of injury.

Safety is everyones business!

Before setting off

The driver is responsible for the safety of the passengers and

the safe operation of the vehicle.

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note

the following points before every trip:

Make sure that the vehicles lights and turn signals are working

properly.

Check tyre pressure.

Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the

surroundings.

Make sure all luggage is secured page 17.

Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.

Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly according

to your size.

Ensure that the passen

head restraints in the in

Instruct passengers to

their height.

Protect children with ap

applied seat belts p

Assume the correct sitt

also to assume a prope

Fasten your seat belt se

fasten their seat belts p

What affects driving saf

Driving safety is largely

the personal behaviour

As a driver, you are respon

When your concentration o

stance, you endanger your

for this reason:

Always pay attention to

passengers or telephon

Never drive when your d

tion, alcohol, drugs).

Observe traffic laws an

Safe driving 9

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 9 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and

weather conditions.

When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least

every two hours.

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.

Safe driving10

reduce the risk of injury in the event of an

he following adjustments for the driver:

el so that there is a distance of at least 25

g wheel and the centre of your chest

rwards or backwards so that you are able

, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with

angled .

ch the highest point of the steering

nt so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

head fig. 2.

upright position so that your backrests

Fig. 2 Proper head restraint position for driver

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 10 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Proper sitting position for occupants

Proper sitting position for driver

The proper sitting position for the driver is important for a

safe and relaxed driving.

For your own safety and to

accident, we recommend t

Adjust the steering whe

cm between the steerin

fig. 1.

Move the driver seat fo

to press the accelerator

your knees still slightly

Ensure that you can rea

wheel.

Adjust the head restrai

level as the top of your

level as the top of your

Move the backrest to an

completely against it.

Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel

Safe driving 11

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

for front passenger

st sit at least 25 cm away from the

airbag can provide the greatest

he event that it is triggered.

reduce the risk of injury in the event of an

the following adjustments for the front

ger seat back as far as possible .

n upright position so that your backrests

int so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

r head page 13.

otwell in front of the front passenger seat.

ecurely page 19.

e passenger airbag in exceptional circum-

r seat page 136.

tion of the front passenger can lead to severe

er seat so that there is at least 25 cm between el. If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the t you properly.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 11 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Fasten your seat belt securely page 19.

Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under

control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver seat page 133.

WARNING

An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.

Adjust the driver seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel page 10, fig. 1. If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The work- shop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 oclock and 3 oclock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.

Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 oclock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu- vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back- rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.

Proper sitting position

The front passenger mu

dash panel so that the

possible protection in t

For your own safety and to

accident, we recommend

passenger:

Move the front passen

Move the backrest to a

completely against it.

Adjust the head restra

level as the top of your

level as the top of you

Keep both feet in the fo

Fasten your seat belt s

It is possible to deactivate th

stances page 25.

Adjusting the front passenge

WARNING

An incorrect sitting posi injuries.

Adjust the front passeng your chest and the dash pan airbag system cannot protec

Safe driving12

otwell in front of the rear seat.

curely page 19.

d restraint system when you take children

6.

ear seat are not sitting properly, they could

properly in order to achieve maximum protec-

e optimal protection when backrests are in an engers are wearing their seat belts properly. are not sitting in an upright position, the risk itioning of the seat belt increases.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 12 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The work- shop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.

Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.

To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats

Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their

feet on the footwells, have the head restraints positioned for

use and wear their seat belts properly.

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking

manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must

consider the following:

Adjust the head restraint to the correct position page 14.

Keep both feet in the fo

Fasten your seat belt se

Use an appropriate chil

in the vehicle page 4

WARNING

If the passengers on the r sustain severe injuries.

Adjust the head restraint tion.

Seat belts can only provid upright position and the pass If passengers on the rear seat of injury due to incorrect pos

WARNING (continued)

Safe driving 13

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

properly in order to achieve maximum

int so that its upper edge is at the same

head or as close as possible to the same

r head and, at the very least, at eye level

page 133

restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.

d restraints could result in death in the event of

d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.

t always be adjusted according to the

d into their seats during a rear end collision. The

e backrest activates the active head restraint*

s rapidly forwards and upwards at the same

the distance between the occupants head and

cing the risk of head injuries such as brain

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 13 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of

passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in

most accident situations.

Adjust the head restraint

protection.

Adjust the head restra

level as the top of your

level as the top of you

fig. 3 and fig. 4.

Adjusting the head restraints

WARNING

Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe

Incorrectly adjusted hea a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte

The head restraints mus passengers height.

Active head restraints*

Vehicle occupants are presse

resulting body pressure on th

on the front seat, which move

time. This movement reduces

the head restraint, thus redu

trauma.

Fig. 3 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front

Fig. 4 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side

Safe driving14

ar seat head restraints

restraints are an important part of the

d can reduce the risk of injuries in

s

Fig. 5 Head restraints in correct position

Fig. 6 Head restraint position warning label

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 14 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

WARNING

Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries.

Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.

The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the passengers height.

Note The active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant

applies a high level of pressure on the backrest (e.g. by falling back into the

seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat head

restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dangerous,

as the active head restraints will return to the original position immediately

and are thus once again ready.

Correct adjustment of re

Properly adjusted head

passenger protection an

most accident situation

Safe driving 15

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

itting positions

ition can lead to severe injuries to

timal protection only when the belt webs

ncorrect sitting positions substantially

tion of seat belts and increase the risk of

t belt position. As the driver, you are

occupants, especially children.

assume an incorrect sitting position in the

.

amples of sitting positions that could be

The list is not complete, but we would like to

.

icle is in motion:

,

r to the rear,

sh panel,

h,

e of a seat,

w,

a window,

dash panel,

surface of a seat,

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 15 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Rear outer seat head restraints

The rear outer seat head restraints have 3 positions.

Two positions for use page 14, fig. 5. In these positions, the

head restraints are used normally, protecting passengers along

with the rear seat belts.

And one position for non-use.

To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges

with both hands in the direction of the arrow.

Centre rear head restraint

The centre head restraint only has two positions, in-use (head

restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).

WARNING

Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warning label located on the rear side fixed window page 14, fig. 6.

Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat rear head restraints.

Risk of injury in case of an accident!

Caution Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints page 134.

Examples of incorrect s

An incorrect sitting pos

occupants.

Seat belts can provide op

are properly positioned. I

reduce the protective func

injury due to incorrect sea

responsible for all vehicle

Never allow anyone to

vehicle while travelling

The following list contains ex

dangerous for all occupants.

make you aware of this issue

Therefore, whenever the veh

Never stand in the vehicle

never stand on the seats,

never kneel on the seats,

never tilt your backrest fa

never lean against the da

never lie on the rear benc

never sit on the front edg

never sit sideways,

never lean out of a windo

never put your feet out of

never put your feet on the

never put your feet on the

Safe driving16

e pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in

port your feet properly and give you a good

n can lead to critical situations while driving.

e driver footwell. An object could move into al operation. In the event of a sudden driving

ill not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ident!

side

used which can be securely fastened

ot impair operation of the pedals.

ats are securely fastened during the trip

pedals .

ve the pedals clear and which are secured to

u can obtain suitable floor mats from a special-

r floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

d, an accident may occur. Risk of serious inju-

s are always securely attached.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 16 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

do not allow anyone to travel in the footwell,

never travel without wearing the seat belt,

do not allow anyone to travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Any incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.

Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries if airbags are triggered, by striking a passenger who has assumed an incor- rect sitting position.

Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main- tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to sit properly and to stay in this position during the trip page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

Pedal area

Pedals

The operation of all pedals must never be impaired by objects

or floor mats.

Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and

clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.

Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial posi-

tions.

Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely

fastened on the footwell.

If a brake circuit fails, the brak

order to stop the vehicle.

Wearing suitable shoes

Always wear shoes which sup

feeling for the pedals.

WARNING

Restricting pedal operatio

Never place objects on th the pedal area and impair ped or braking manoeuvre, you w accelerator pedal. Risk of acc

Floor mats on the driver

Only floor mats may be

in the footwell and do n

Ensure that the floor m

and do not obstruct the

Only use floor mats which lea

prevent them from slipping. Yo

ised dealership. Fasteners* fo

WARNING

If the pedals are obstructe ries.

Ensure that the floor mat

Safe driving 17

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

he luggage compartment and secure them on

cure heavy objects.

res or accidents, loose objects can be thrown upants or passers-by. This increased risk of ed if a loose object is struck by an inflating cts can be transformed into missiles. Risk of

tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicles handling and lead to an acci-

ial to adjust your speed and driving style nts.

d axle weights or allowed maximum weight. If allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving e may change, leading to accidents, injuries

unattended, especially when the tailgate is to the luggage compartment, closing the door

apped and run the risk of death.

lay in or around the vehicle. Close and lock all you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the e are no adults or children in the vehicle.

ers in the luggage compartment. All passen- lt fastened page 19.

le helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used

on slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-

tion slits are never covered.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 17 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.

Storing objects

Loading the luggage compartment

All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in

the luggage compartment.

Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the

driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the

centre of gravity.

Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.

Place heavy objects as far forward as possible in the luggage

compartment.

Place the heavy objects first.

Secure heavy objects to the fastening rings page 18.

WARNING

Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment could cause serious injuries.

Always stow objects in t the fastening rings.

Use suitable straps to se

During sudden manoeuv forward, injuring vehicle occ injury will be further increas airbag. If this happens, obje fatal injury.

Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Therefore, it is essent accordingly, to avoid accide

Never exceed the allowe the allowed axle load or the characteristics of the vehicl and damage to the vehicle.

Never leave your vehicle open. Children could climb in behind them; they will be tr

Never allow children to p the doors and tailgate when vehicle, make sure that ther

Never transport passeng gers must have their seat be

Note Air circulation in the vehic

air escapes through ventilati

ment. Ensure that the ventila

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Safe driving18

age or other objects from flying forward, ing cords which are secured to the fastening

on the fastening rings.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 18 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially

available.

Fastening rings*

There can be four fastening rings in the luggage compart-

ment for fastening luggage and other objects.

Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage

and other objects to the fastening rings in Loading the

luggage compartment on page 17.

Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.

During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so

much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of kinetic

energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object. The

most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.

Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During

a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corre-

sponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the

object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries

which might be sustained if this object strikes an occupant as it flies through

the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be further

increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.

WARNING

If pieces of luggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings with inappropriate or damaged retaining cords, injuries could be sustained in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents.

To prevent pieces of lugg always use appropriate retain rings.

Never secure a child seat

WARNING (continued)

Seat belts 19

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

e is approved only for four seats. Two front seats

ble seats must never be transported in your

ehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat eat. Children must be protected with an appro- .

*

as a reminder to the driver to fasten

e:

ecurely.

rs to fasten their seat belts properly before

ng a child seat according to the childs

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 19 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Seat belts

Brief introduction

Before driving: remember your seat belt!

Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!

In this chapter you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts,

how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.

Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in

this chapter.

WARNING

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases.

Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and your passen- gers must always wear the seat belts properly while the vehicle is moving.

Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Like all other passengers, these people can also sustain severe inju- ries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is

equipped with a three-point seat belt.

In some versions, your vehicl

and two rear seats.

WARNING

More people than availa vehicle.

Every passenger in the v belt belonging to his or her s priate child restraint system

Seat belt warning lamp

The warning lamp acts

the seat belt.

Before starting the vehicl

Fasten your seat belt s

Instruct your passenge

driving off.

Protect children by usi

height and weight.

Seat belts20

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 20 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

After the ignition has been switched on, the warning lamp on the instru-

ment panel lights up1) if the driver has not fastened his/her seat belt, and an

acoustic signal is heard if the vehicle is driven at more than 30 km/h.

The warning lamp* is switched off if the driver seat belt is fastened while

the ignition is switched on.

1) Depending on the model version.

Seat belts 21

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

aws of physics work in the case of a head-on

rts moving fig. 7, a certain amount of energy

oduced in the vehicle and its occupants.

depends on the speed of the vehicle and the

passengers. The higher the speed and the

energy there is to be released in an accident.

owever, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed

km/h, for example, the kinetic energy is multi-

ur example are not restrained by seat belts, in

n all of their kinetic energy has to be absorbed

8.

50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-

nne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are

belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a

ove forward at the same speed their vehicle was

Fig. 8 The vehicle hits the wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 21 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Why wear seat belts?

Physical principles of frontal collisions

In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic

energy must be absorbed.

It is easy to explain how the l

collision: When a vehicle sta

known as kinetic energy is pr

The amount of kinetic energy

weight of the vehicle and its

greater the weight, the more

The most significant factor, h

doubles from 25 km/h to 50

plied by four.

Because the passengers in o

the case of a head-on collisio

at the point of impact fig.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h to

sion can easily exceed one to

even higher.

Passengers not wearing seat

head-on collision, they will m

Fig. 7 Vehicle about to hit a wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts

Seat belts22

acting on the body in a collision are so great

oneself with ones hands. In a frontal collision,

wn forward and will make violent contact with

l, windscreen or whatever else is in the way

stitute for seat belts. When triggered, airbags

tion. All occupants (including the driver) must

g the trip. This will reduce the risk of severe

dent regardless of whether an airbag is fitted

ered only once. To achieve the best possible

always be worn properly so that you will be

h no airbag is deployed.

passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they

ward violently in an accident. Rear passengers

anger not only themselves but also the front

Fig. 10 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 22 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on

collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.

The danger of not using the seat belt

The general belief that the passengers can protect them-

selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.

Even at low speeds the forces

that it is not possible to brace

unbelted passengers are thro

the steering wheel, dash pane

fig. 9.

The airbag system is not a sub

provide only additional protec

wear seat belts properly durin

injuries in the event of an acci

for the seat or not.

Note that airbags can be trigg

protection, the seat belt must

protected in accidents in whic

It is also important for the rear

could otherwise be thrown for

who do not use seat belts end

occupants fig. 10.

Fig. 9 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.

Seat belts 23

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

n seat belts before every trip, even when "just

wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics

t belts is an effective means of substantially

d improving the chances of survival in a serious

rly worn seat belts improve the protection

ent of an accident. For this reason, wearing a

most countries.

pped with airbags, the seat belts must be

airbags, for example, are only triggered in some

irbags will not be triggered during minor frontal

ns, rear collisions, overturns or accidents in

hold value in the control unit is not exceeded.

wear your seat belt and ensure that your

eir seat belts properly before you drive off!

using seat belts

rrectly, they can reduce the risk of

elt as described in this section.

lts can be fastened at all times and are not

incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- rotection from seat belts can be achieved only

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 23 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Seat belt protection

Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the

event of an accident.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-

tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.

Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to

severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of

being thrown from the vehicle.

Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability

of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle and other

passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to

absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these

features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of

injury.

Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts

substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is

why it is so important to faste

driving around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers

have shown that wearing sea

reducing the risk of injury an

accident. Furthermore, prope

provided by airbags in the ev

seat belt is required by law in

Although your vehicle is equi

fastened and worn. The front

frontal accidents. The front a

collisions, minor side collisio

which the airbag trigger thres

Therefore, you should always

passengers have fastened th

Safety instructions on

If seat belts are used co

injury in an accident.

Always wear the seat b

Ensure that the seat be

damaged.

WARNING

If the seat belts are worn ries increases. The optimal p if you use them properly.

Fig. 11 A driver wearing the seat belt properly is secured by the belt in sharp braking

Seat belts24

damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.

ean, otherwise the retractors may not work

nt and rear occupants are locked into

its full protection if the seat belt is not

Fig. 12 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 24 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. The other passengers must also wear the seat belts at all times, otherwise they run the risk of being injured.

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not posi- tioned correctly.

Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.

Keep both feet in the footwell in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

The seat belt must never be twisted while it is being worn.

The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.

Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.

Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.

The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.

Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.

Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci- dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.

Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a specialised workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.

Do not attempt to repair a must not be removed or mod

The belts must be kept cl properly page 213.

Seat belts

Seat belt adjustment

The seat belts for the fro

position by a latch.

The seat belt cannot offer

positioned correctly.

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Seat belts 25

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ximum protection only when they are

Fig. 13 Correct seat belt and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from front

Fig. 14 Correct seat belt and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from side

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 25 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.

To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly

across your chest and lap.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and

push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click

page 24, fig. 12.

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in

the buckle.

The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder

strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled

slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in steep areas or

bends and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt

is locked.

The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with seat belt

tensioners page 28.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.

Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.

If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned seat belt can cause extremely severe injuries.

Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 page 46.

Seat belt position

Seat belts offer their ma

properly positioned.

Seat belts26

lso fasten their seat belts properly

he unborn child is for the mother to

rly at all times during the pregnancy.

imum protection only when the seat belt

age 25.

d head restraint correctly page 10.

pull the belt evenly across your chest and

the pelvis fig. 15.

to the buckle for the corresponding seat

it is securely locked with an audible click

hat the latch plate is securely engaged in

Fig. 15 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 26 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder

region:

belt height adjustment for the front seats.

front seat height adjustment*.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso page 25, fig. 13.

The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis page 25, fig. 14. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.

Read and observe the warnings page 23.

Pregnant women must a

The best protection for t

wear the seat belt prope

The seat belt provides max

is properly positioned p

Adjust the front seat an

Holding the latch plate,

as low as possible over

Insert the latch plate in

and push it down until

.

Pull the belt to ensure t

the buckle.

Seat belts 27

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim

hile the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you ng severe or fatal injuries.

height

ers can be used to adjust the position

houlder.

the front seats can be used to adjust the

shoulder.

Fig. 17 Location of the belt height adjuster

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 27 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.

Read and observe the warnings page 23.

Seat belt release

The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has

come to a standstill.

Press the red button on the belt buckle fig. 16. The latch plate

is released and springs out .

Guide the belt back by

is not damaged

WARNING

Never unbuckle a seat belt w increase the risk of sustaini

Adjusting the seat belt

Seat belt height adjust

of the seat belt at the s

The seat belt adjuster for

proper belt position at the

Fig. 16 Removing latch plate from buckle

Seat belts28

information and warnings concerning the use

rs

t tensioner

, the seat belts on the front seats are

upants are equipped with belt tensioners.

elt tensioners during severe head-on, lateral

f the seat belt is actually being worn. This

belts, reducing the forward motion of the occu-

triggered only once.

ot be triggered in the event of a light frontal,

hicle overturns or in situations where no large

rear of the vehicle.

are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is

ion of fire in the vehicle.

ments must be observed when the vehicle or

scrapped. Specialised workshops are familiar

are also available to you.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 28 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in this

position page 27, fig. 17.

Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted

the seat belt page 25.

After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the

catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.

Incorrectly fastened seat belts

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even mortal

injuries.

Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is

properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order

described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs

substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe

or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially

increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has

assumed an incorrect sitting position. As the driver, you are respon-

sible for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:

Never allow anyone to wear the seat belt incorrectly while the

vehicle is moving .

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.

Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts properly and to wear them for the whole journey.

Read and always observe of seat belts page 23.

Seat belt tensione

Function of the seat bel

During a frontal collision

retracted automatically.

The seat belts for the front occ

Sensors will only trigger the b

and rear collisions, and only i

retracts and tightens the seat

pants.

The seat belt tensioner can be

The seat belt tensioners will n

side or rear collision, if the ve

forces act on the front, side or

Note If the seat belt tensioners

normal and it is not an indicat

The relevant safety require

components of the system are

with these regulations, which

WARNING (continued)

Seat belts 29

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 29 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Service and disposal of belt tensioners

The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the

seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and install

parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be

damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt

tensioners function incorrectly or not at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt tensioner is not reduced and that

removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-

tions, which are known to the specialised workshops, must be observed.

WARNING

Improper use or repairs not carried out by qualified mechanics increase the risk of severe or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.

Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tensioners or seat belts.

The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and automatic retractor cannot be repaired.

Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a specialised workshop only.

The belt tensioners will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed if they have been activated.

Airbag system30

critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This

possible distance between yourself and the

t airbags can completely deploy when trig-

m protection.

at will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-

d the speed of the vehicle.

red depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-

ollision and detected by the control unit. If the

during the collision and measured by the

specified reference values, the front, side

be triggered. Take into account that the visible

in an accident, no matter how serious, is not a

ags to have been triggered.

orrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi- al injuries.

hildren, who are not properly belted can s if the airbag is triggered. Children up to 12 l on the rear seat. Never transport children in trained or the restraint system is not appro- eight.

at belt, if you lean forward or to the side while rect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury will be further an inflating airbag.

y from an inflating airbag, always wear the .

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 30 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the

seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting

position must be assumed.

For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure

the following before driving:

Always wear the seat belt properly page 19.

Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly

page 10.

Adjust the front passenger seat correctly page 11.

Adjust the head restraint correctly page 13.

Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your

vehicle page 46.

The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an

incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause

you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all passengers in the vehicle

assume a correct sitting position while travelling.

A sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat

belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case,

the inflating airbag may inflict

also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest

front airbag. This way, the fron

gered, providing their maximu

The most important factors th

dent, the angle of collision an

Whether the airbags are trigge

ation rate resulting from the c

vehicle deceleration occurring

control unit remains below the

and/or curtain airbag will not

damage in a vehicle involved

determining factor for the airb

WARNING

Wearing the seat belt inc tion can lead to critical or fat

All occupants, including c sustain critical or fatal injurie years old should always trave the vehicle if they are not res priate for their age, size or w

If you are not wearing a se travelling or assume an incor increased risk of injury. This increased if you are struck by

To reduce the risk of injur seat belt properly page 19

Airbag system 31

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat gainst the door, the roof or the backrest.

tances, it is necessary to transport a child in a front passenger seat, it is absolutely essential ng safety measures:

assenger airbag page 44, Deactivating

e approved by the child seat manufacturer for seat with front or side airbag.

instructions given by the child seat manufac- fety instructions page 46, Child safety.

ling the child seat, push the front passenger rds so that the greatest possible distance to ag is ensured.

prevent the front passenger seat from being .

nt passenger seat must be in an upright

g and seat belt tensioner

itors the airbag and seat belt

ll airbags and seat belt tensioners in the vehicle,

iring connections.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 31 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Always adjust the front seats properly.

The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat

Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front

passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.

The front passenger airbag is a serious risk for a child if it is activated. The

front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if he/she is transported in a

rear-facing child seat. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the

rear seat.

If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating

airbag can strike it with such force that it can cause critical or fatal injuries.

Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats.

That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front

passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch page 44.

When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the age and size

of each child page 46.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off,

an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.

WARNING

If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.

Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju- ries if the front passenger airbag is triggered.

An inflating front passen and hurl it with great force a

If, under special circums rear-facing child seat on the that you observe the followi

Deactivate the front p airbags*.

The child seat must b use on a front passenger

Follow the installation turer and observe the sa

Before properly instal seat completely backwa the front passenger airb

Ensure that no objects pushed completely back

The backrest of the fro position.

Warning lamp for airba

This warning lamp mon

tensioner system.

The warning lamp monitors a

including control units and w

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Airbag system32

nd disposal of airbags

are installed in various places in your vehicle.

rbag system or parts have to be removed and

forming other repair work, parts of the airbag

e event of an accident this could cause the

not inflate at all.

nts must be observed when the vehicle or

scrapped. Specialised workshops and vehicle

ith these requirements.

ut by a professional, or if the airbags are used or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may in the wrong circumstances.

hing on the steering wheel hub or the surface enger side of the dash panel, and do not

ny way.

ch any objects such as cup holders or tele- aces covering the airbag units.

el or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a r clean the dash panel and the airbag module ing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to

triggered, plastic parts could become

djust, remove or install parts of the airbag

stem or removal and installation of the airbag (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should lised workshop. Specialised workshops have formation and qualified personnel.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 32 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner system

Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems operation is constantly monitored

electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on, the warning lamp

lights for several seconds and the display in the instrument panel* shows

AIRBAG / TENSIONER.

The system must be checked when the warning lamp :

does not light up when the ignition is switched on,

after the ignition is switched on, it turns off after 4 seconds,

turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,

lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving.

In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In

addition, depending on the malfunction, a fault message appears in the

display of the instrument panel for approx. 10 seconds and a short acoustic

signal is given. In this event, you should have a specialised workshop check

the system immediately.

If any of the airbags are de-activated by the Authorised Service Centre, the

indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off

if there is no fault.

WARNING

If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tensioner system cannot properly perform its protective function.

If a malfunction occurred, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag system and belt tensioners may not be triggered, or may not be triggered correctly.

Repairs, maintenance a

The parts of the airbag system

If work is carried out on the ai

fitted on the system when per

system may be damaged. In th

airbag to inflate incorrectly or

The relevant safety requireme

components of the airbag are

disposal centres are familiar w

WARNING

If repairs are not carried o incorrectly, the risk of severe fail to inflate, or could inflate

Do not cover or stick anyt of the airbag unit on the pass obstruct or modify them in a

It is important not to atta phone mountings to the surf

To clean the steering whe water-moistened cloth. Neve surface with cleaners contain become porous. If the airbag detached and cause injuries.

Never attempt to repair, a system.

Any work on the airbag sy components for other repairs be performed only by a specia the necessary tools, repair in

Airbag system 33

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 33 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

We strongly recommend you to go to a specialised workshop for all work on the airbag system.

Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

For the sake of the environment The airbags, which are a special type of waste, must be disposed of through

an authorised service, because they contain pyrotechnic elements.

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system34

is located in the steering wheel fig. 18 and

ger is located in the dash panel fig. 19.

ord AIRBAG.

elts, the front airbag system gives the front

on for the head and chest in the event of a

e 37, Safety notes on the front airbag system.

ction of restraining the occupants, the seat

ront passenger in a position where the airbags

ion in a frontal collision.

stitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

e safety system. Please bear in mind that the

ffectively when the occupants are wearing their

djusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,

e seat belts at all times, not only because this

ntries, but also for your safety page 19,

bag system are:

onitoring system (control unit)

ag with gas generator) for the driver and front

instrument panel page 31

s monitored electronically. The airbag warning

onds every time the ignition is switched on

if the warning lamp :

ignition is switched on page 31

ed on, it turns off after 4 seconds,

p again after the ignition is switched on,

he vehicle is moving.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 34 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Front airbags

Description of front airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The front airbag for the driver

the airbag for the front passen

Airbags are identified by the w

In conjunction with the seat b

occupants additional protecti

severe frontal collision pag

In addition to their normal fun

belts also hold the driver and f

can provide maximum protect

The airbag system is not a sub

of the vehicles overall passiv

airbag system can only work e

seat belts correctly and have a

it is most important to wear th

is required by law in most cou

Brief introduction.

The main parts of the front air

an electronic control and m

the two front airbags (airb

passenger,

a warning lamp on the

The airbag system operation i

lamp will light up for a few sec

(self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system

does not light up when the

after the ignition is switch

turns off and then lights u

lights up or flashes while t

Fig. 18 Driver airbag located in steering wheel

Fig. 19 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel

Airbag system 35

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ags

the risk of head or chest injury.

d so that the airbags for the driver and front

severe frontal collision.

e front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-

, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and

d front passenger fig. 20. The fully deployed

movement of the front occupants and help to

e head and the upper part of the body.

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag. After the collision, the

allow visibility.

rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to

in the event of an accident. A fine dust may

Fig. 20 Inflated front airbags

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 35 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

The front airbag system will not be triggered if:

the ignition is switched off

there is a minor frontal collision,

there is a side collision,

there is a rear-end collision

the vehicle turns over

WARNING

The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal colli- sion the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Operation of front airb

Inflated airbags reduce

The airbag system is designe

passenger are triggered in a

In certain types of accident th

gered together.

When the system is triggered

deploy in front of the driver an

airbags cushion the forward

reduce the risk of injury to th

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant p

chest are surrounded and pro

airbag deflates sufficiently to

The airbags deploy extremely

provide additional protection

Airbag system36

. 21 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags triggered

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 36 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of

fire in the vehicle.

Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered

The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver

and front passenger airbags are triggered fig. 21. The airbag covers

remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.

Fig are

Airbag system 37

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ags

t a substitute for the seat belts.

ated in the driver seat and front passenger seat

side airbags are located in the rear wheel

are identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper

n the rear wheel housing lining.

the side airbag system gives the front seat occu-

or the upper body in the event of a severe side

notes on the operation of the side airbag

rbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on

the body facing the impact. In addition to their

the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also

Fig. 22 Side airbag in driver seat

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 37 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Safety notes on the front airbag system

If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the

risk of injury in many kinds of accident.

WARNING

It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of at least 25cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant.

If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.

Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates page 46, Child safety.

The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

Side airbags*

Description of side airb

The airbag system is no

The front side airbags are loc

backrests fig. 22. The rear

housing lining. The locations

region of the backrests and i

Together with the seat belts,

pants additional protection f

collision page 40, Safety

system.

In a side collision, the side ai

the front seats to the areas of

normal function of protecting

Airbag system38

door panels have been removed or if the ly fitted.

the loudspeakers in the door panels have les left by the loudspeakers have been

enings are closed or covered if loudspeakers in the interior door panels.

e doors should be made in a specialised work-

s can only provide maximum protection if the ly page 10, Proper sitting position for

he airbag system, have the system checked workshop. Otherwise, during a side collision, r, or not trigger correctly.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 38 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

hold the passengers on the front seats and the outer rear seats in a position

where the side airbags can provide maximum protection.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

of the vehicles overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the

airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their

seat belts. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times,

not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your

safety page 19, Brief introduction.

The side airbag system will not be triggered if:

the ignition is switched off

there is a minor side collision

there is a frontal collision

there is a rear-end collision

the vehicle turns over

The main parts of the airbag system are:

an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)

The front side airbags in the backrests of the front seats and the rear side

airbags in the lining of the rear wheel housing

a warning lamp on the instrument panel page 31

The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag warning

lamp will light up for approx. 4seconds every time the ignition is switched on

(self-diagnosis).

WARNING

In a side-on collision the side airbags will not work if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel.

Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.

Never drive if the interior panels have not been correct

Never drive the vehicle if been removed, unless the ho correctly closed.

Always check that the op or other equipment are fitted

Any work carried out to th shop.

The seat belts and airbag occupants are seated correct occupants.

If a fault has occurred in t immediately by a specialised the system may fail to trigge

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 39

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 39 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Operation of side airbags

Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in

many side impact collisions.

In some side collisions, the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the

vehicle fig. 23.

In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-

gered together.

When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to

provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may

develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of

fire in the vehicle.

The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the

front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the

upper body.

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant p

chest are surrounded and pro

Fig. 23 Inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle

Airbag system40

incorrect sitting position, they expose them- injury in the event of an accident. This is ild is travelling on the front passenger seat gered in an accident; this could have critical us injury or death page 46, Child safety.

ag system or removal and installation of the repairs (such as removal of the front seat) a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults system operation.

components of the airbag system in any way.

s are managed through sensors located in the ensure the correct functioning of the side and rs nor the door panels should be modified in kers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag

ly. All work carried out on the front door must kshop.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 40 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system

If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the

risk of injury in side impact collisions.

WARNING

If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.

In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.

Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered.

Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over seats with side airbags unless the covers have been approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag is triggered from the side of the backrest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbags effectiveness page 214, Accessories, parts replacement and modifications.

Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a specialised workshop.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

When children assume an selves to an increased risk of particularly the case if the ch and the airbag system is trig consequences including serio

Any work on the side airb airbag components for other should only be performed by may occur during the airbag

Do not attempt to modify

The side and head airbag interior of the front doors. To head airbags neither the doo any way (e.g. fitting loudspea system may not work correct be made in a specialised wor

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 41

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

untries, but also for your safety page 19,

airbag system are:

monitoring system (control unit)

gs with gas generator) for the driver, front

n the rear seats,

instrument panel page 31

is monitored electronically.

ll not be triggered if:

ff

g. 24 Location of head airbags on the left side of the hicle

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 41 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Curtain airbags

Description of curtain airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors

fig. 24 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-

pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a

severe side collision page 42, Safety notes on the operation of the

curtain airbag system.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

of the vehicles overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the

airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their

seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,

it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this

is required by law in most co

Brief introduction.

The main parts of the curtain

an electronic control and

the curtain airbags (airba

passenger and passengers o

a warning lamp on the

The airbag system operation

The curtain airbag system wi

the ignition is switched o

Fi ve

Airbag system42

e curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side

e front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-

the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the

vers the side windows and door pillars.

rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to

in the event of an accident. A fine dust may

oys. This is normal and it is not an indication of

hion the movement of the front occupants and

y to the upper body.

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag.

ration of the curtain airbag system

tly, they can considerably reduce the

ds of accident.

gs to provide their maximum protection, the ust always be maintained with seat belts

rtain airbag must be disconnected in those ger compartment separation screen. See an make this adjustment.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 42 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

there is a frontal collision

there is a rear-end collision

the vehicle turns over

there is a minor side collision

WARNING

If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked imme- diately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Operation of curtain airbags

Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in

a side collision.

During some side collisions th

of the vehicle fig. 25.

In certain types of accident th

gered together.

When the system is triggered,

process, the curtain airbag co

The airbags deploy extremely

provide additional protection

develop when the airbag depl

fire in the vehicle.

The fully deployed airbags cus

help to reduce the risk of injur

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant pu

chest are surrounded and pro

Safety notes on the ope

If you use airbags correc

risk of injury in many kin

WARNING

In order for the side airba prescribed sitting position m fastened while travelling.

For safety reasons, the cu vehicles fitted with a passen Authorised Service Centre to

Fig. 25 Deployed curtain airbags

Airbag system 43

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 43 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu- pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows page 214, Accessories, parts replacement and modifica- tions.

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a specialised workshop.

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system44

g is deactivated, only the front airbag is

irbags in the vehicle remain activated.

senger airbag

in the key operated switch in the glove

sition OFF fig. 26.

lamp OFF on the instrument panel

en the ignition is switched on .

nger airbag

the key-operated switch in the glove

sition ON fig. 26.

Fig. 27 Warning lamp for deactivated passenger airbag in centre console

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 44 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Deactivating airbags*

Front passenger airbag deactivation

If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,

the front passenger airbag must be de-activated.

When the passenger airba

deactivated. All the other a

Deactivating the front pas

Switch the ignition off.

Turn the ignition switch

compartment to the po

Check that the warning

fig. 27 remains lit wh

Activating the front passe

Switch the ignition off.

Turn the ignition key in

compartment to the po

Fig. 26 In the glove compartment: switch for activating and deacti- vating the front passenger airbag

Airbag system 45

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

key to activate/deactivate the front passenger nger airbag will be activated/deactivated. The on the passenger side will remain active.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 45 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Check that the warning lamp on the instrument panel

page 44, fig. 27 does not light up when the ignition is

switched on .

WARNING

The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch.

You should deactivate the front passenger airbag only if you have to use a rear-facing child seat in exceptional cases. page 46, Child safety.

Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. Otherwise, there is a risk of death. If under exceptional circumstances it is necessary to trans- port a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger airbag.

As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.

Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other- wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, which could cause the airbag to not deploy properly or not deploy at all.

When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit up, there may be a fault in the airbag system:

Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a specialised workshop.

Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju- ries.

It is unpredictable whether the front passenger airbag will deploy in the event of an accident. Warn all your passengers of this.

When using the ignition airbag, only the front passe side airbag and head airbag

WARNING (continued)

Child safety46

the manufacturers Child Seat instruction

oard documentation.

hild seats

s substantially reduces the risk of

onsible for any children you transport in

properly using the appropriate child

seat belt is properly positioned according

ided by the manufacturer of the child

allow children to distract you from traffic.

uring long trips. Take a break at least

facing backwards on the front passenger seat irbag has been disabled. This could lead to a es to the child! However, if it is necessary, in rt a child in the front passenger seat, the front s be disabled page 44, Deactivating

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 46 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Child safety

Brief introduction

Introduction

Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear

seat than on the front passenger seat.

For safety reasons we recommend that children under 12 years of age travel

on the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children trav-

elling on the rear seat must use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety reasons,

the child seat should be installed in the centre of the rear seat or behind the

front passenger seat.

The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to

children. page 21, Why wear seat belts?. But unlike adults, children do

not have muscle and bone structures fully developed. This means that chil-

dren are subject to a greater risk of injury.

To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems

when travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-

sories Programme, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke2).

These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with

the ECE-R44. regulation.

Follow the manufacturers instructions and observe any statutory require-

ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and note

page 46, Safety notes on using child seats.

We recommend you to include

manual together with the on-b

Safety notes on using c

Proper use of child seat

injury in an accident!

As the driver, you are resp

your vehicle.

Protect your children by

seats page 48.

Always ensure that the

to the instructions prov

seat.

When travelling, do not

Take breaks regularly d

every two hours.

WARNING

Never install a child seat unless the front passenger a risk of potentially fatal injuri exceptional cases, to transpo passenger airbag must alway2) Not for all countries.

Child safety 47

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

aximum protection only when the seat belt is 24, Seat belts.

py a child seat page 48, Child seats.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 47 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

airbags*. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest position.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.

All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.

Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child!

Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and to the other passengers.

If children assume an improper sitting position when the vehicle is moving, they expose themselves to greater risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly important if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; as this could cause serious injury or even death.

A suitable child seat can protect your child!

Never leave an unsupervised child alone on a child seat or in the vehicle.

Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.

Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident.

Do not allow the seat belt to become twisted or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor collision or in sudden braking manoeuvres.

The seat belt provides m properly positioned page

Only one child may occu

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Child safety48

ats

a correctly adjusted seat belt can

child.

t 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most

aring in the illustration fig. 28.

ut 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most

aring in the illustration.

tructions and observe any statutory require-

ing child seats.

the manufacturers Child Seat instruction

oard documentation.

ormation and warnings concerning the use of notes on using child seats on page 46.

Fig. 28 A group 0 rear- facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 48 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Child seats

Categorisation of child seats into groups

Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable

for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic

Commission for Europe Regulation

The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:

Group 0: children up to 10 kg

Group 0+: children up to 13 kg

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg

Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg

Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R44 standard

bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number

below it).

Group 0 and 0+ child se

A suitable child seat and

help you to protect your

Group 0: For babies from abou

suitable seats are those appe

Group 0+: For babies from abo

suitable seats are those appe

Follow the manufacturers ins

ments when installing and us

We recommend you to include

manual together with the on-b

WARNING

Read and always observe inf child seats in Safety

Child safety 49

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ats

d a correctly adjusted seat belt can

r child.

tructions and observe any statutory require-

ing child seats.

e the manufacturers Child Seat instruction

board documentation.

weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best

ats together with properly adjusted seat belts.

eighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5

by seat cushions with head restraints together

fig. 30.

Fig. 30 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 49 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Group 1 child seats

A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can

help you to protect your child.

Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the rear

of the vehicle are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing

between 9 and 18 kg.

Follow the manufacturers instructions and observe any statutory require-

ments when installing and using child seats.

We recommend you to include the manufacturers Child Seat instruction

manual together with the on-board documentation.

WARNING

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.

Group 2 and 3 child se

A suitable child seat an

help you to protect you

Follow the manufacturers ins

ments when installing and us

We recommend you to includ

manual together with the on-

Group 2 child seats

Children under 7 years of age

protected by group 2 child se

Group 3 child seats

Children over 7 years of age w

metres tall are best protected

with properly worn seat belts

Fig. 29 A category 1 forward-facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.

Child safety50

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 50 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

WARNING

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack page 24, Seat belts.

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.

Child safety 51

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

n must be secured in the vehicle with a age, weight and size.

facing backwards on the front passenger seat irbag has been disabled. This could cause fatal r, if, in exceptional cases, it is necessary to passenger seat, the front passenger airbag

irbags* must always be disabled and the seat tion, where possible.

information and warnings concerning the use ty notes on using child seats on page 46.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 51 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Securing child seats

Ways to secure a child seat

A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on

the front passenger seat.

You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the

following ways:

Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.

Group 0, 0+ and 1 child seats with the ISOFIX system can be secured to

the ISOFIX retaining rings. In this case, seat belts are not necessary.

U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age

category (universal retention systems are those fitted using the adult

seat belt).

*: Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, as high as

possible and always deactivate the airbag.

L: Suitable for retention systems using the ISOFIX anchors.

WARNING

When travelling, childre restraint system suitable for

Never install a child seat unless the front passenger a injuries to the child! Howeve transport a child in the front page 44, Deactivating a adjusted to its highest posi

Read and always observe of child seats in Safe

Category Weight

Seat locations

Front passen- ger

Rear outer Rear centre

Group 0 <10 kg U* U/L U

Group 0+ <13 kg U* U/L U

Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/L U

Group 2 / 3 15-36 kg U* U U

Child safety52

e child seat, please be sure to follow the

s.

rear as it will go.

o the ISOFIX retaining rings until the child

gage securely. If the child seat is

er* anchor points, secure it to the corre-

. Observe the manufacturers instruc-

e child seat to ensure that it is secure.

fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the

ame and, in others, they are secured to the rear

X rings is between the rear seat backrest and

ether* anchors are located at the rear of the

or in the luggage compartment).

d Top Tether* attachment system are available

entres.

signed only for use with ISOFIX and Top

that do not have the ISOFIX and Top Tether* er objects to the securing rings this could

ries to the child!

is secured correctly using the ISOFIX and Top

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 52 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Child seats fastened with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* system

Child seats with the ISOFIX or Top Tether* system can be

secured quickly, easily and safely on the rear outer seats.

When removing or fitting th

manufacturers instruction

Move the seat as far to

Press the child seat ont

seat can be heard to en

equipped with Top Teth

spondent ring fig. 32

tions.

Pull on both sides of th

Two ISOFIX retaining rings are

rings are secured to the seat fr

floor. The access to the ISOFI

the seat cushioning. The Top T

backs seats (behind the seat

Child seats with the ISOFIX an

from the Authorised Service C

WARNING

The securing rings are de Tether* child seats.

Never secure child seats system, retaining belts or oth result in potentially fatal inju

Ensure that the child seat Tether* securing rings.

Fig. 31 ISOFIX securing rings

Fig. 32 Top Tether* securing ring

53

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 53 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

54

Fig. 3

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 54 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

3 Dash panel

Cockpit 55

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ated front passenger airbag . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nsole:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ing

er socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

itch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

losing the front windows . . . . . . . .

r windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

closing the rear windows . . . . . . . .

162

137

44

30

140

175

145

96

189

149

131

180

120

170

168

219

110

110

110

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 55 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Operating Instructions

Cockpit

Overview

Overview of the dash panel

This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the

controls and displays.

Door release lever

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lighting control for instrument and control lighting . . . . . . .

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air vent

Turn signal and main beam lever and cruise control system*

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel:

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ Driver front airbag

Windscreen wiper and washer lever and operation of the

multifunction display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Left seat heating button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Controls for

Heating* and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Climatronic* . . . . . .

Radio/Navigator*

Right seat heating butto

Warning lamp for deactiv

Front passenger airbag

Glove compartment leve

Selector lever . . . . . . . .

Cup holder compartmen

Controls on the centre co

Central locking . . . .

ESP* . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tyre pressure monitor

Cigarette lighter / Pow

Exterior mirror adjustm

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . .

Hazard warning light sw

Pedals

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . .

Steering column control

Handle for releasing the

Button for opening and c

Safety switch* for the rea

Control* for opening and

A1

A2 115

A3 119

A4 119

A5

A6 121, 183

A7 88

A8

57

60

76

A9 30

A10

126, 62

A11 137

A12

156

158

A13

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

A24

A25

A26

A27

A28

A29

Cockpit56

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 56 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Note Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain model

versions or are optional extras.

Cockpit 57

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

g. 34 Detailed view of the dash panel: instrument nel

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 57 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Instruments

Instrument overview

The instruments display the vehicle operating status.

Detailed view of the dash panel: instrument panel

Fuel gauge page 58

Multifunction display

Engine coolant temperature gauge page 58

Rev counter page 59

Time adjustment button / trip recorder reset button page 59

Speedometer

Fi pa

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

Cockpit58

ture gauge

ngine coolant temperature.

heavy engine loads fig. 36.

the needle should be in the middle section of

y also rise when the engine is working hard,

peratures. This is no cause for concern as long

light up and no warning message* appears on

, fig. 49 will light up if the needle is in the

arning message appears on the instrument

Fig. 36 Instrument panel: engine coolant tempera- ture gauge

A2

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 58 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Fuel gauge and reserve indicator

Instrument panel: fuel gauge

The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres.

When the needle reaches the reserve area fig. 35 (arrow), the warning

lamp will light up and an acoustic signal will sound reminding the driver to refuel. At this point there are still 7 litres of fuel in the tank.

The following text appears on the instrument panel display 3) PLEASE REFUEL [XXX].*

Engine coolant tempera

This gauge shows the e

Needle in cold zone

Avoid high engine speeds and

Needle in normal zone

In normal driving conditions,

the scale. The temperature ma

especially at high outside tem

as the warning lamp does not

the instrument panel display.

Needle in warning zone

The warning lamp* page 76

warning zone. The following w

3) Depending on the model version.

Fig. 35 Instrument panel: fuel gauge

AA

AB

AC

Cockpit 59

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

nvironment s early will help you to reduce fuel consumption,

ine noise.

d with a digital odometer and a trip recorder, in

s display.

the instructions shown on page 195 should

k*

ted in the instrument panel display.

page 57, fig. 34 clockwise until the

our. The hour will flash. To change the

.

lockwise to the second click to set the

ill flash. To change the minutes, press the

A5

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 59 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

panel display 4). Stop the vehicle and switch off the engine. Check the

coolant level page 226 .

Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should obtain

technical assistance.

WARNING

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warn- ings page 219.

Caution Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At

high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the

engine overheating.

Rev counter

The rev counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per

minute.

The start of the red zone page 57, fig. 34 indicates the maximum

engine speed operating at service temperature. However, it is advisable to

change up to a higher gear, move the selector lever to D or lift your foot off the

accelerator before the needle reaches the red zone.

Caution The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of

engine damage.

For the sake of the e Changing up into higher gear

emissions and minimise eng

Speedometer

The speedometer is equippe

addition to a service interval

During the running-in period,

be followed.

Setting the digital cloc

The digital clock is loca

Turn the setting knob first click to set the h

hour, press the button

Turn the setting knob c

minutes. The minutes w

button.

4) Depending on the model version.

A4

Cockpit60

ment panel shows the mileage and

he selector lever position.

On the right of the display: Selector lever posi-

atic gearbox*. The actual position of the

which is engaged (for tiptronic) is highlighted.

tomatic displays in this field.

those on the multifunction display (MFI)

rmation and warning messages.

nformation and which can be used to make

shown: Instrument panel menus

ice interval display.

Fig. 38 Digital instru- ment panel display

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 60 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Digital instrument panel display

Display (without warning or information texts)

The display in the instrument panel shows, amongst other

things, the mileage and trip recorder as well as the selector

lever position.

Digital clock display page 59. On the right of the display: Selector

lever position display for the automatic gearbox*. The current position of

the selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for tiptronic)* is high-

lighted.

Outside temperature.

Odometer or flexible service interval display*.

Displayed categories*

The display on the instru

trip recorder as well as t

Clock: Setting the time.

tion display for the autom

selector lever or the gear

There are optional and au

Optional indicators: e.g.

Automatic indicators: Info

Menus providing further i

diverse settings are also

Outside temperature:

Odometer or flexible serv

Fig. 37 Detailed view of the instrument panel: screen with different indi- cators

A1

A2

A3

A1

A2

A3

A4

Cockpit 61

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

s dependent on time/distance travelled already

set. The intervals are calculated individually in

e.

nly indicates the dates of services that include

of all other services, such as Inspection Service

r in the sticker on the door pillar or in the Main-

pear in the odometer if a service is due soon. A

nd the display km with the distance that can

ce appointment is due. The display will change

ds. A clock symbol appears and the number

intment should be carried out. The following

rument panel display*:

ppear approximately 20 seconds after the igni-

ine is running. The normal display can be

e reset button on the trip counter or by pressing

g wheel controls.

check the current service message at any

menu or turning the reset button to access the

d by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 61 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Recommended gear display*

This display helps to save fuel.

Use the gear display to save fuel. If you are driving in the correct gear, a dot

will be shown next to the gear display. If you are not in the correct gear, an

arrow will appear next to the gear display indicating whether you should

change up or down.

Odometer or flexible service interval display

Odometer

The left-hand counter in the display registers the total amount of distance

covered by the vehicle.

The right-hand counter registers the short journeys. The last digit indicates

steps of 100 metres. The trip recorder counter may be reset by holding down

the reset button for a few seconds.

Service interval display

Vehicles with Service interval have certain service intervals

vehicles with LongLife servic

The service interval display o

engine oil change. The dates

or brake fluid change, appea

tenance Programme.

A Service pre-warning will ap

spanner symbol appears a

be driven until the next servi

after approximately 10 secon

of days until the service appo

message is shown in the inst

Service in [XXXX] km or

[XXXX] days

The service message will disa

tion is switched on or the eng

resumed by briefly pressing th

the button on the steerin

With the ignition on, you can

moment in the Vehicle status service display.

An overdue service is indicate

information.

Fig. 39 Gear display

OK

Cockpit62

FI)*

y (MFI) shows you information on the

ption.

Fig. 40 Rocker buttons A and B. Steering wheel controls.

Fig. 41 Digital instru- ment panel display

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 62 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Indications for vehicles with LongLife service

Technical progress has made it possible to considerably reduce servicing

requirements. With the LongLife System, SEAT ensures that your vehicle only

has an interval service when it is necessary. The length of the service intervals

(max. two years) is determined by factors such as conditions under which the

vehicle is used and personal driving style.

The service pre-warning will first appear 20 days before the date on which the

service is due. The distance travelled is rounded off to the nearest 100 km

and the time to full days. The current service message can only be consulted

500 km after the last service. Until that time, only dashes are displayed.

Note If you reset the display manually, the next service interval will be indi-

cated after 15,000 km or one year and will not be calculated individually.

Do not reset the display between service intervals as the display will

otherwise be incorrect.

In LongLife Service vehicles, if the battery is disconnected for a long

period, the days remaining until the next service cannot be calculated. There-

fore, the service message displays on the instrument panel may be incorrect.

Take into account the maximum authorised service intervals.

Multifunction display (M

The multifunction displa

journey and fuel consum

Cockpit 63

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

tifunction display (MFI)*

ollowing displays in the multifunction display

tch fig. 42 on the windscreen wiper lever.

Fig. 42 Rocker buttons A and B. Steering wheel controls.

Fig. 43 Digital instru- ment panel display: average fuel consumption indicator.

AB

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 63 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

The multifunction system uses two automatic memories: 1 - Actual memory and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory will be shown

in the upper right-hand corner of the display.

Selecting a memory

When the ignition is on, briefly press button page 62, fig. 40

on the windscreen wiper lever to change from one memory to

another or press button on the steering wheel controls

page 62, fig. 40.

Resetting a memory

Select the memory that you would like to reset.

Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or button

on the steering wheel controls for at least 2 seconds.

The trip memory 1 collects the travel and consumption rates from the

moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is

continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will

be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically

be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.

The total memory 2 collects the trip data for any number of individual jour-

neys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours) up to a

total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km distance travelled.

The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named values is

reached.

Information in the mul

You can switch between the f

(MFI) by operating rocker swi

AA

AA

AA AA

Cockpit64

ing the figures for tank content and current fuel

r the vehicle can travel using the same condi-

sumption

will be shown page 63, fig. 43 after a

metres has been travelled. Until then dashes

display will be updated every 5 seconds while

mount of fuel used will not be shown.

consumption

ent fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the

our when the vehicle is in a stationary position

how your driving style affects fuel consump-

ds from -45 C to +58 C. At temperatures

bol is displayed and a warning sounds if the

20 km/h (ice danger warning). This symbol

s and remains lit until the outside temperature

as already lit.

peed, enter the speed indicator mode and

he display remembers the indicated speed. If

ed, a warning message is displayed on the

al is given.

essing the button (Reset).

on, the message on the screen may vary and may be

speed indication or by a speed message.

AA

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 64 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Memory displays

Driving speed

Journey duration

Average speed

Distance

Distance to empty

Average fuel consumption

Current fuel consumption

Outside temperature display

Speed warning

Km/h - Driving speed

Driving speed is digitally shown in the display.

min - Journey duration

The display shows the amount of time which has elapsed since the ignition

was switched on.

The maximum display value in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.

The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.

km/h - Average speed

The average speed will be shown after running a distance of approximately

100 metres. Until then dashes will appear in the display. The display will be

updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in motion.

km - Distance travelled

The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.

The maximum display value in both memories is 1999 km. The memory will

automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.

Km - Fuel range

The fuel range is calculated us

consumption. It shows how fa

tions as a reference.

l/100 km - Average fuel con

The average fuel consumption

distance of approximately 100

will appear in the display. The

the vehicle is in motion. The a

l/100 km or l/h - Current fuel

The display will show the curr

vehicle is in motion or in litre/h

with the engine running.

Using this display you can see

tion page 197.

Outside temperature display

The measurement range exten

below +4 C, an ice crystal sym

vehicle is moving at more than

will flash for about 10 second

rises above +4 C or 6 C if it w

Set speed indicator

When driving at the required s

press the button (Reset), t

the indicated speed is exceed

screen 5) and an acoustic sign

This may be deactivated by pr

5) Depending on the model versi

represented by flashing of the

AA

Cockpit 65

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

t warning or information texts, faults are indi-

ing lamps.

ty 1 (red)

the warning lamp will flash or light up and will

ible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop

engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain

cessary.

detected at the same time, the symbols will be

for about 2 seconds at a time and will continue

e display for the duration of a priority 1 warning

g messages (red)

with warning message STOP BRAKE FLUID OP BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL

he warning message STOP SEE COOLANT

ol with the warning message STOP ENGINE CTION MANUAL.

ty 2 (yellow)

he warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied

unction should be checked as soon as possible.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 65 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

The speed may be altered using the rocker switch in steps of 5 km/h

within 5 seconds of the initial memory value.

WARNING

There could be black ice on the road surface even if the snowflake symbol is not shown. For this reason you should not rely exclusively on this display - Risk of accident!

Note When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-

ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual outside temperature as

a result of the heat radiated from the engine.

Warning or information message in the display

Faults are shown in the display with warning lamps and

warning/information reports.

The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the igni-

tion is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Functional faults are indi-

cated by symbols with warning or information messages in the display. An

acoustic warning is given in certain cases.

Warning symbols

There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols

(priority 2)

Information text

In addition to warning messages given on a fault, you will receive information

in the display on procedures or will be asked to carry out certain tasks.

Note In the case of screens withou

cated exclusively by the warn

Warning reports, Priori

If one of these faults occurs,

be accompanied by three aud the vehicle and switch off the

professional assistance if ne

If several priority 1 faults are

displayed one after the other

until the fault is corrected.

No menus will be shown in th

message.

Examples of priority 1 warnin

Brake system symbol

INSTRUCTION MANUAL or ST

Coolant symbol with t

INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

Engine oil pressure symb

OIL PRESSURE LOW! INSTRU

Warning reports, Priori

If one of these faults occurs, t

by one audible warning. The f

AB

Cockpit66

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 66 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

If several priority 2 warning messages are detected at the same time, the

symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After

a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will be shown

as a reminder at the side of the display.

Priority 2 warning messages will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning

messages have been dealt with!

Examples of priority 2 warning messages (yellow):6)

Fuel warning light with the information text PLEASE REFUEL.

Windscreen washer fluid symbol with the information text REFILL WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID. Refill the windscreen washer tank

page 228.

6) Depending on the model version.

Cockpit 67

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ning will be used as an example of how to

ood idea if you are, for example, using

suited for the top speed of the vehicle.

ith the MFI lever

for two seconds to return to main menu

y be necessary to repeat this operation

displayed.

uration with the MFI lever

m the menu, press the upper or lower end

e selected option is displayed between

ll also be a triangle on the right.

tion.

Fig. 45 Steering wheel controls: button A to confirm the menu selec- tion and switch B to change the menu

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 67 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Instrument panel menus*

Example of menu use

All the menus on the instrument panel may be used according

to the following procedure. The instrument panel menus may

vary according to the version of the model.

The setting of a speed war

use the menus. This is a g

winter tyres which are not

1. Open the main menu w

Switch the ignition on.

Hold down button

from other menu. It ma

until the main menu is

2. Open the menu Config

To choose an option fro

of the rocker switch. Th

two lines and there wi

Select menu Configura

Fig. 44 Windscreen wiper lever: button A to confirm the menu selection and rocker switch B to change the menu

AB

Cockpit68

ipment one or more of these menus will be

unction ame of menu displayed

he current set speed is displayed

r dashes will be shown if the function is deac-

vated.

the function is activated or deactivated

he set value increases by 10 km/h

he set value decreases by 10 km/h

he menu Winter tyres is closed and the last

isplayed menu is shown.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 68 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Press button on the windscreen wiper lever. The Configura- tion menu is opened.

2. Access the Configuration menu with the steering wheel controls

To access the Configuration menu, press button

page 67, fig. 45 until the menu is displayed. Now you are in

this menu.

3. Open the main menu Winter tyres

Select option Winter tyres using switch .

Press button . The menu Winter tyres is opened.

4. Program a speed limit warning

Use button to select the option +10 km/h or 10 km/h and

press button to either increase or decrease the set speed.

5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit warning

Use switch to select the menu point On / Off and press the

button to switch the speed warning on or off. If the speed

warning is deactivated, three dashes will be displayed ---

6. To close the menu Winter tyres

In the menu select Back.

The function Winter tyres sends an optical and an acoustic signal when the

vehicle reaches the set speed.

Example menu Winter tyres

Note For electronic and vehicle equ

displayed.

AA

AC

AB

AA

AB

AB

AB

In the menu Winter tyres

F N

X km/h T

or --- o

ti

On / Off If

+10 km/h T

-10 km/h T

Back T

d

Cockpit 69

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ct button for at least two seconds. It

peat this operation until the main menu is

ain menu

m the menu, press the upper or lower end

e selected option is displayed between

ect the entry.

e 67

Function

e to the multifunction display (MFI): Multi-

n display (MFI)

enu displays the available information for the

audio source (radio station, CD audio track /

USB / iPod / Bluetooth audioa) / call

ationa).

enu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with

ation system. The navigation system must be

ed on. When the route guidance is activated,

ning arrows and proximity bars are displayed.

play is similar to that of the Navigation sys-

oute guidance is not activated, the direction of

(compass) and the name of the street along

you are driving are shown.

AB

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 69 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Main menu

The menu provides access to the different display functions

(only with the MFI lever).

Open main menu

Switch the ignition on.

Press and hold the eje

may be necessary to re

displayed.

Select a menu from the m

To choose an option fro

of rocker switch . Th

two horizontal lines.

Press button to sel

Example of menu use pag Fig. 46 Windscreen wiper lever (MFI): button A to confirm the menu selec- tion and rocker switch B to change the menu

Fig. 47 Digital instru- ment panel display: Main menu

Main menu

Multifunction dis- play

Chang

functio

Audio This m

active

MP3 /

inform

Navigation This m

a navig

switch

the tur

The dis

tem.

If the r

travel

which

AB

AA

Cockpit70

enu (MFI)

y (MFI) shows you information on the

ption.

) has two automatic memories: 1 - Trip memory cted memory is shown on the upper right hand

8 at all times.

y menu

isplay menu from the main menu page 69

on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunc-

ory to another, briefly press button

e 67 on the windscreen wiper lever or the

on lever page 67, fig. 45 page 67 while

n.

Fig. 48 Multifunction display (MFI) instrument panel display.

AA

OK

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 70 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be

displayed.

Multifunction display m

The multifunction displa

journey and fuel consum

The multifunction display (MFI

and 2 - Total memory. The sele

section of the display fig. 4

Open the multifunction displa

Select the Multifunction d and press the button

tion lever*.

Selecting a memory

To change from one mem

page 67, fig. 44 pag

button on the multifuncti

the ignition is switched o

Telephone This menu is only available in vehicles with radio unit

if the vehicle is fitted with the telephone function. In

vehicles fitted with a radio navigation system, this

menu is available in the central unit (navigator)

Booklet SEAT Media System 2.1.

Vehicle condition This menu displays current warning or information

texts: Vehicle status menu

This option flashes when one of these texts is dis-

played.

Configuration This option allows the time, the speed warning when

using winter tyres, units, language, independent

heating, the Light and visibility menu and the Con-

venience menu to be reset.

a) Only in vehicles fitted with a radio navigation system.

OK

Cockpit 71

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

h displays are shown on the instrument panel

ifunction Display Data from the Configuration

ated or deactivated individually by marking the

the button on the windscreen wiper lever or

eel*.

t of time which has elapsed since the ignition

n both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.

ly be deleted once this value has been reached.

l/100 km or l/h

ent fuel consumption in litres/100 km whilst the

s/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary posi-

e how your driving style affects fuel consump-

0 km

will be shown after a distance of approximately

d. Until then dashes will appear in the display.

very five seconds while the vehicle is in motion.

not be shown.

sing the figures for tank content and current fuel

ar the vehicle can travel using the same condi-

OK

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 71 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Resetting a memory

Select the memory where you wish to erase the values.

Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on

the multifunction* steering wheel for at least two seconds.

The journey memory 1 collects the travel and consumption data from the

moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is

continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will

be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically

be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.

The total journey memory 2 collects the journey data for any number of indi-

vidual journeys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours)

up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km distance trav-

elled. The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named values is

reached.

Memory indications

The following data can be viewed on the multifunction display using the

rocker switch page 67, fig. 44 page 67 on the windscreen wiper

lever or by pressing button or page 67, fig. 45 on the multifunction

steering wheel*.

Duration

Current fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Distance to empty

Distance

Average speed

Auxiliary speed

Digital display of speed7)

Speed warning at --- km/h

Personal selection of display

The driver can establish whic

display as required:

Select the submenu Mult menu page 73.

The displays can be activ

required option and pressing

the multifunction steering wh

Duration in h and min

The display shows the amoun

was switched on.

The maximum display value i

The memory will automatical

Current fuel consumption in

The display will show the curr

vehicle is in motion or in litre

tion with the engine running.

Using this display you can se

tion.

Average consumption in l/10

The average fuel consumption

100 metres has been travelle

The display will be updated e

The amount of fuel used will

Fuel range in km

The fuel range is calculated u

consumption. It shows how f

tions as a reference.

7) It is not possible to see whether the alternative speed display is activated.

AA OK

AB

Cockpit72

es from -40 C (-40 F) to +50 C (+125 F). At

4 C (+39.2 F), the snowflake symbol (ice

dition to the outside temperature display. This

nds and remains lit until the outside tempera-

F).

e road surface even if the snowflake symbol you should not rely exclusively on this display

ent panels; therefore the multifunction display

ary or travelling at very low speeds, the

slightly higher than the actual outside temper-

diated from the engine.

on steering wheel* do not have buttons on the

ultifunction display can only be controlled from

on steering wheel*.

ng or information texts

enu

le status from the main menu: Main

n on the windscreen wiper lever OK AA

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 72 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Distance travelled in km

The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.

The maximum display value in both memories is 1999 km. The memory will

automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.

Average speed in km/h

The average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100

metres has been travelled. Until then dashes will appear in the display. The

display will be updated every five seconds while the vehicle is in motion.

Alternative speed display (mph or km/h)

The speed is also displayed in a second unit of measurement other than that

used on the speedometer.

Select the menu Configuration using the rocker switch on the windscreen

wiper lever or the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel* page 67.

Select the option Auxiliary speed and press on the windscreen wiper

lever or the multifunction steering wheel*.

Digital display of speed

The instrument panel display gives the speed in digital format7).

Speed warning at --- km/h

This function may help you to keep within the speed limits. Press the

button on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunction steering wheel*

to select the current speed. The instrument panel display gives the selected

speed, for example, Speed warning 120 km/h. You have five seconds to reset

the speed between 30 km/h and 250 km/h using rocker switch or buttons

or on the multifunction steering wheel*. Press the button or wait

five seconds until the speed is stored and the warning is activated. If the set

speed is exceeded, an acoustic signal is heard and a warning message is

displayed until the speed is reduced to at least 4 km/h below the stored

speed. The function is switched off by pressing the button again. Speed warning --- km/h is now displayed on the instrument panel.

Outside temperature display

The measurement margin rang

outside temperatures below +

danger warning) appears in ad

symbol flashes for a few seco

ture rises above +6 C (+42.8

WARNING

There could be black ice on th is not shown. For this reason - Risk of accident!

Note There are different instrum

may vary.

When the vehicle is station

temperature displayed may be

ature as a result of the heat ra

Vehicles with a multifuncti

windscreen wiper lever. The m

the buttons on the multifuncti

Vehicle status menu

This menu shows warni

Open Vehicle Condition m

Select the option Vehic menu and press butto

page 69, fig. 46. or

OK

OK

AA

AB

OK

OK

Cockpit 73

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

Function

is menu is used to establish the data in the

ultifunction display menu to be displayed on

e instrument panel page 70

is menu allows you to make the settings for

e convenience functions in the vehicle.

m this menu it is it possible to alter the vehi-

lighting settings.

e hours and minutes of the clock and the navi-

tion system can be changed. Choose between

and 24-hour format and change to summer

e.

e menu allows the setting of a speed at which

optical and acoustic warning will be given by

e system. You can use this function, for exam-

e, if you have fitted winter tyres which are not

ited for the top speed of your vehicle. Please

e the section Wheels and tyres.

e display texts and the navigation system texts

n be seen in different languages.

is option allows you to select the units for dis-

aying temperature, fuel consumption values

d distances.

e instrument panel also displays the speed in

other different unit of measurement (mph or

/h) to that given on the speedometer.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 73 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*

page 67, fig. 45 until the Vehicle Status menu is displayed.

Priority 2 warning messages and information texts: Information and warning

messages on the screen will automatically disappear from the screen after a

time and will be stored in the Vehicle status menu.

The warning and information texts may be viewed in this menu. If there is no

warning or information message, the option Vehicle status is not displayed.

If there are several messages, each one is shown for a few seconds.

Example of menu use page 67

Note If there are no warning messages, this menu is not available.

Configuration menu

This menu is used to make the settings for the vehicle func-

tions.

Open Configuration menu

Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main

menu and press button page 67, fig. 44 on the wind-

screen wiper lever. or

Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*

page 67, fig. 45 until the Configuration menu is displayed.

Example of menu use page 67

OK AA

Displayed on the screen

Multifunction display data.

Th

m

th

Convenience Th

th

Lights and visibility Fro

cle

Time Th

ga

12

tim

Winter tyres Th

an

th

pl

su

se

Settings: Language Th

ca

Units Th

pl

an

Aux. Speed Th

an

km

Cockpit74

venience from the main menu and press

indscreen wiper lever.

67

ipment one or more of these menus will be

Function

door: Individual unlocking activated.

. locking: the doors are automatically locked

the vehicle is travelling at more than approx

m/h.

unlock: the doors are unlocked when the key

oved from the ignition.

ing and closing electric windows: this deter-

s whether to open or close all the windows

the vehicle is unlocked or locked. The open

tion can also be activated for the driver door

chronised adjustment is selected, when the

r side exterior mirror is adjusted, the passen-

xterior mirror is also moved.

anufacturers predefined values for the func-

of this menu are restored.

returns to the Configuration menu

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 74 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be

displayed.

SEAT dealers are able to programme other functions or change the

existing functions depending upon the vehicle equipment.

The Configuration menu is only accessible when the vehicle is at a

standstill.

Convenience menu

From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle conven-

ience settings.

Open menu Convenience

Choose the option Configuration from the main menu and press

the button page 67, fig. 44 on the windscreen wiper

lever.

Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*

page 67, fig. 45 until the Configuration menu is displayed.

Choose the option Con the button on the w

Example of menu use page

Note For electronic and vehicle equ

displayed.

Inter Service Consult service messages and reset service inter-

val display here.

Factory settings The manufacturers predefined values for the

functions of this menu are restored.

Backa) This returns to the main menu

a) Only if the windscreen wiper lever is used (MFI).

OK AA

Displayed on the screen

Open door One

Auto

when

15 k

Auto

is rem

Elec. window control Open

mine

when

func

only.

Exterior mirror adjust. If syn

drive

ger e

Factory settings The m

tions

Back This

AA

Cockpit 75

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

uipment one or more of these menus will be

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 75 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Lights and visibility menu

From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting

settings.

Open Lights and visibility Menu

Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main

menu and press button page 67 on the windscreen

wiper lever. or

Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*

page 67, fig. 45 until the Configuration menu is displayed.

Select the option Lights & visibility from the menu and press

button on the windscreen wiper lever.

Example of menu use page 67

Note For electronic and vehicle eq

displayed.

Displayed on the screen

Function

Coming Home/ Leaving Home

This option permits the adjustment of the time

during which the headlights remain lit after the

vehicle is locked, and also permits the function to

be connected and disconnected

Indicator conf. The convenience turn signal function can be acti-

vated or deactivated here. With the convenience

mode activated, the turn signal will blink at least

three times when turned on.

Factory settings The manufacturers predefined values for the func-

tions of this menu are restored.

Back This returns to the Configuration menu

OK AA

AA

Cockpit76

. 49 Instrument panel indicator and warning lamps. e of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only

certain model versions or are optional extras.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 76 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Warning lamps

Overview of the warning lamps

The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.

Fig Som on

Cockpit 77

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

belt tensioner system fault or

sabled

page 28

page 31

ctive page 84

e applied,

fluid level or

rake system

page 84

l pressure

page 85

g: engine oil sensor faulty

ins lit: insufficient engine oil

ntrol system switched on page 85

n indicator page 85

lit: TCS disabled

page 86

page 87

page 169

chanical steering page 85

e emission control system page 86

g: Electronic Stability Pro-

(ESP) or the TCS is working

ins lit: ESP or TCS faulty

page 86

page 87

page 169

ever lock (automatic gearbox) page 87

ng of indicator and warning lamps

Further infor- mation

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 77 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Item Symbol Meaning of indicator and warning

lamps Further infor-

mation

Fuel level / reserve page 79

Coolant level / coolant temperature page 80

Rear fog light switched on page 80

Turn signals in operation page 80

Engine fault (petrol engine) page 81

Glow plug system for diesel engine page 81

Main beam switched on page 81

Soot accumulation in the diesel engine

particulate filter page 81

ABS system fault page 82

Windscreen washer fluid level page 82

Alternator fault page 82

Fasten seat belts! page 19

Brake pad worn page 83

Tyre pressure page 83

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

A10

A11

A12

A13

Airbag or

airbag di

Bulb defe

Handbrak

low brake

fault in b

Red: Engine oi

Yellow: If flashin If it rema

Cruise co

Door ope

If it stays

Electrome

Fault in th

If flashin gramme

If it rema

Selector l

Item Symbol Meani

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

A24

Cockpit78

etected at the same time, the symbols will be

or about 2 seconds at a time and will continue

display for the duration of a priority 1 warning

g messages (red)

ith the warning message STOP BRAKE FLUID AKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL.

e warning message STOP SEE COOLANT

l with the warning message STOP ENGINE TION MANUAL.

ellow)

e warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied

k the corresponding function as soon as

may be used without risk.

essages are detected at the same time, the

er the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After

t will disappear and the symbol will be shown

e display.

ill not be shown until all Priority 1 warning

th!

g messages (yellow):8)

information text PLEASE REFUEL.

ymbol with the information text REFILL Top up the washer fluid level.

n.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 78 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

WARNING

Failure to observe warning lamps and warning messages can result in serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users in order to prevent danger to third parties.

The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, you must switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings page 219.

Note The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without

warning or information messages in the display.

In vehicles with warning or information texts on the screen, the appro-

priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information

message will also appear on the screen.

Warning symbols

There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning

symbols (priority 2)

Warning reports, Priority 1 (red)

If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will

be accompanied by three audible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop

the vehicle and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain

professional assistance if necessary.

If several priority 1 faults are d

displayed one after the other f

until the fault is corrected.

No menus will be shown in the

message.

Examples of priority 1 warnin

Brake system symbol w

SERVICE MANUAL or STOP BR

Coolant symbol with th

INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

Engine oil pressure symbo

OIL PRESSURE LOW! INSTRUC

Warning reports, Priority 2 (y

If one of these faults occurs, th

by one audible warning. Chec

possible although the vehicle

If several priority 2 warning m

symbols are displayed one aft

a set time, the information tex

as a reminder at the side of th

Priority 2 warning messages w

messages have been dealt wi

Examples of priority 2 warnin

Fuel warning light with the

Windscreen washer fluid s

WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID.

8) Depending on the model versio

Cockpit 79

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

o indicate that the fuel tank is under

of fuel remain in the tank. You will also hear a

u to fuel up the fuel tank as soon as possible

s the following message9): PLEASE REFUEL!.

t-Stop system activated. Vehicle in Stop mode.

t-Stop system activated. Switch off the ignition

e the vehicle.

the engine. Gearbox overheated.

tart the engine, press the brake pedal. Only in

automatic gearbox.

f central locking function activated.

ting mode active. Transmission engaged. Only

th automatic gearbox.

f central locking function activated.

ording the version of the vehicle model.

ion.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 79 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Information messages displayed on the screen*

Fuel level / reserve

This symbol lights up t

the reserve level.

It lights up when only 7 litres

warning signal. It reminds yo

page 216.

The instrument panel display

Messagea) Description

SERVICE The service interval has ended. Take the vehicle to an

authorised service.

Immobiliser system active. The vehicle will not start. Take

the vehicle to an authorised service.

Instrument panel faulty. Take the vehicle to an authorised

service.

CLEAN AIR FILTER

Warning: The air filter must be cleaned

NO KEY Warning: Correct key cannot be found in the vehicle.

Warning: Key battery low. Change the battery.

CLUTCH Warning: Press the clutch to start. In vehicles with manual

gearbox and Start/Stop system.

--> P/N Warning: Place the selector level in P/N to start. Only in vehi-

cles with automatic gearbox.

--> P Warning: Place the selector lever in position P to stop the

engine.

STARTING Warning: The engine starts automatically. Start-Stop system

activated.

START MANUALLY

Warning: The engine must be started manually. Start-Stop

system activated.

ERROR START STOP

Warning: Start-Stop system error.

START STOP IMPOSSIBLE

Warning: Although the Start-Stop system is switched on, the

engine cannot be stopped automatically. Not all the neces-

sary conditions are met

START STOP ACTIVE

Warning: Star

SWITCH OFF Warning: Star

when you leav

STOP TRANSMI-

SSION TOO HOT

Warning: Stop

BRAKE Warning: To s

vehicles with

CHECK SAFELOCK

Notification o

COASTING FUNCTION

Warning: Coas

in vehicles wi

CHECK SAFELOCK

Notification o

a) These messages may vary acc

9) Depending on the model vers

IMMOBILI-

ERROR

KEY BATTERY

SER

Cockpit80

rature gauge. If the needle is in the normal

he earliest opportunity .

ised for technical reasons, move it to a safe engine off, turn the hazard lights on and

ou can see or hear steam or coolant escaping t. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no team or coolant.

is a dangerous area! Before carrying out any ent, switch off the engine and allow it to cool ponding warnings page 219.

hen the rear fog light is switched on . For

e 115.

es when the turn signals are in oper-

al is operating, either the left or right turn

cator lamps will flash at the same time when

switched on.

, the indicator lamp will start flashing twice

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 80 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Coolant level* / temperature

The warning lamp lights up if the coolant temperature is too

high or if the coolant level is too low.

There is a fault if:

The warning symbol does not go out again after a few seconds.

The warning lamp lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving, and

three acoustic warning signals are emitted.

This means that either the coolant level is too low or the coolant temperature

is too high.

Coolant temperature too high

The instrument panel displays the following message10): CHECK COOLANT INSTRUCTION MANUAL. page 226.

First look at the coolant temperature gauge. The coolant temperature is too

high if the needle is over the warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle, switch the engine off and wait for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.

If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction

of the radiator fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces-

sary page 255.

If the warning lamp lights up again after driving on for a short distance, stop the vehicle and switch the engine off. Contact an Authorised Service Centre

or a specialised workshop.

Coolant level too low

The instrument panel displays the following message11): STOP CHECK COOLANT INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

First look at the coolant tempe

range, top up with coolant at t

WARNING

If your vehicle is immobil distance from traffic. Turn the place the warning triangle.

Never open the bonnet if y from the engine compartmen longer see or hear escaping s

The engine compartment work in the engine compartm down. Always note the corres

Rear fog light

This warning lamp lights up w

further information see pag

Turn signals

The indicator lamp flash

ation.

Depending on which turn sign

signal lamp flashes. Both indi

the hazard warning lights are

If any of both turn signals fails

faster than normal. 10) Depending on the model version. 11) Depending on the model version.

Cockpit 81

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ts up when the main beams are on.

hed on once main beams are on or once the

.

page 121.

he diesel engine particulate filter

s up you should help the filter clean itself by

nner.

utes in fourth or fifth gear (automatic gearbox:

0 km/h, with the engine running at approxi-

the pollen build up in the filter is burned. When

dicator turns off.

not turn off, or the three lamps turn on (partic-

trol system fault and glow plugs ), take

orkshop to repair the fault.

o the road weather conditions, the terrain and tions should never lead to illegal manoeuvres

ulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- o contact with flammable materials under- e there is a risk of fire.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 81 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

For further information on the turn signals, please see page 121.

Engine management*

This warning lamp monitors the engine management system

for petrol engines.

The warning lamp (Electronic Power Control) lights up when the ignition

is switched on to show that the lamp is working properly. It should go out

once the engine is started.

If there is a fault in the electronic engine management system while you are

driving, this warning lamp will light up. Stop the vehicle and seek technical

assistance.

Glow plug system / Engine fault

The warning lamp lights up to show that the glow plugs are

preheating. It flashes if there is an engine fault.

Warning lamp is lit

The warning lamp lights up while the glow plugs are preheating. When the

warning lamp goes off, the engine should be started straight away.

Warning lamp flashes

If a fault develops in the engine management system while you are driving,

the glow plug lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop

as soon as possible and have the engine checked.

Main beam headlights

The indicator lamp ligh

The warning lamp is switc

headlight flasher is operating

For further information see

Soot accumulation in t

If the warning lamp light

driving in the appropriate ma

To do this, drive about 15 min

S gear range) at a speed of 6

mately 2000 rpm. In this way,

cleaning is successful, the in

If the warning lamp does

ulate filter , emission con

the vehicle to a specialised w

WARNING

Always drive according t traffic. Driving recommenda in surrounding traffic.

The diesel engine partic tures; it should not enter int neath the vehicle. Otherwis

Cockpit82

you brake. This could cause the rear to break the vehicle and seek technical assistance.

s up to indicate that the windscreen

ll up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity

n on the instrument panel display*12): REFILL

als a fault in the alternator.

when the ignition is switched on. It should go

ed running.

up while driving, the alternator is no longer

ld immediately drive to the nearest specialised

cal equipment that is not absolutely necessary

ttery.

n.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 82 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)*

A warning lamp monitors the ABS.

The indicator lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is

switched on. It goes out again after the system has run through an automatic

test sequence.

There is a fault in the ABS if:

The warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.

The warning lamp does not go out again after a few seconds

The warning lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving

The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way, without the ABS function.

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible. For further

information on the ABS go to page 187.

If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESP* warning lamp will also light up.

Brake system fault

If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp

, this indicates not only a fault in the ABS function, but also a possible fault

in the brake system .

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on page 219, Working in the engine compartment.

If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir page 232, Brake fluid. If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN mark you must not drive on. Risk of accident. Obtain technical assistance.

If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have been caused by a failure of the ABS system. This could cause the rear

wheels to lock quickly when away. Risk of skidding. Stop

Washer fluid

This warning lamp light

washer level is too low.

This serves as a reminder to fi

page 228

The following message is show

WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID.

Alternator

This warning lamp sign

The warning lamp lights up

out when the engine has start

If the warning lamp lights

charging the battery. You shou

workshop.

You should avoid using electri

because this will drain the ba

12) Depending on the model versio

WARNING (continued)

Cockpit 83

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ged.

because of a load.

under more pressure (for example, driving with

).

now chains.

el is fitted.

changed.

tyre pressure or after changing one or more

must be kept pressed while the ignition is on

ard and the warning lamp goes out.

sive load (for example, driving with a trailer or

must be increased to the recommended value

on the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre monitor

n, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.

mp lights up

ore wheels is much lower than the value set by

rning lamp lights up .

mp flashes

mp flashes, this indicates a fault. Go to the

p.

arning lamp lights up, reduce speed immedi- manoeuvre or braking. Stop when possible, and status.

for maintaining correct tyre pressures. For this e regularly checked.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 83 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Worn brake pads

If the symbol lights up, have the front brake pads (and, for safety reasons,

the rear pads as well) inspected by a specialised workshop.

Tyre pressure

The tyre pressure control system controls the tyre speed and

the frequency spectrum of each tyre.

The tyre warning lamp13) compares wheel revolutions and with this informa-

tion, the diameter of each wheel using the ESP sensors. If the diameter of a

wheel changes, the tyre warning lamp lights up. The wheel diameter

changes when:

Tyre pressure is insufficient.

The tyre structure is dama

The vehicle is unbalanced

The wheels of one axle are

a trailer or on extreme slopes

The vehicle is fitted with s

The temporary spare whe

The wheel on one axle is

Tyre pressure adjustment

Following the modification to

wheels, the button fig. 50

until an acoustic signal is he

If the wheels are under exces

heavy load), the tyre pressure

for a full load (see the sticker

system button is pressed dow

The tyre pressure warning la

If the tyre pressure of one or m

the driver, the tyre control wa

The tyre pressure warning la

If the tyre pressure warning la

nearest specialised worksho

WARNING

When the tyre pressure w ately and avoid any sudden and check the tyre pressure

The driver is responsible reason, tyre pressure must b

13) Depending on the model version

Fig. 50 Centre console: tyre monitor system button

Cockpit84

with the handbrake on, the following message

anel display 15): HANDBRAKE ON. You will also

al.

low page 232.

the following message15): STOP BRAKE FLUID

system.

the following message15): BRAKE SYSTEM .

p together with the ABS system warning lamp.

t, read and observe the warnings on

does not go out, or if it lights up when page 232, Brake fluid in the reservoir is p the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain tech-

lights up together with the ABS warning of the ABS could be out of action. This could quickly when you brake. This could cause the idding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical

n.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 84 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Under certain circumstances (for example, when driving in a sportslike manner, in winter conditions or on a dirt track) the tyre warning lamp may light up or function incorrectly.

Note If the battery is disconnected, the yellow warning lamp lights up after

turning the ignition on. This should turn off after a brief journey.

Bulb defect

The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicles exte-

rior lighting is defective.

The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicles exterior lighting

(e.g. left-hand main beam) is defective.

The instrument panel displays the following message14): LEFT FULL BEAM FAULTY.

Brake system* / handbrake

The warning lamp lights up if the handbrake is applied, if the

brake fluid level falls too low or if there is a fault in the brake

system.

This warning lamp lights up if

the handbrake is on.

If you drive faster than 6 km/h

will appear on the instrument p

hear an acoustic warning sign

the brake fluid level is too

The instrument panel displays

INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

there is a fault in the brake

The instrument panel displays

FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL

This warning lamp can light u

WARNING

Before opening the bonne page 219.

If the brake warning lamp driving, the brake fluid level too low. Risk of accident. Sto nical assistance.

If the brake warning lamp lamp , the control function cause the rear wheels to lock rear to break away. Risk of sk assistance.

14) Depending on the model version.

WARNING (continued)

15) Depending on the model versio

Cockpit 85

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

s or tailgate*

ts up if one of the doors or the tailgate

go off when all the doors are closed correctly.

the ignition is switched off. It should go off

vehicle is locked.

ring*

ing, the level of steering assistance depends on

e steering angle.

t up for a few seconds when the ignition is

once the engine is started.

, the indicator remains lit, even with the engine

ly goes off after a distance of approx. 50 m.

echanical steering system if the lamp does not

vehicle is in motion. The warning lamp may

rs to indicate faults. If it lights yellow, this indi-

red, seek workshop assistance immediately, as

t working; in this case you should not keep

seek technical assistance. The power steering

s flat or if the engine is off (for example, for

account that you will need considerably more

e vehicle if the power steering is not working

ESP* the function Recommended steering

page 189.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 85 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Engine oil pressure

If this warning lamp is red it indicates that the engine oil pres-

sure is too low.

If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more

oil page 222.

The instrument panel displays the following message16): STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct, do not drive on. The

engine must not even run at idle speed. Obtain technical assistance.

Checking the oil level

If the warning lamp is yellow the engine oil level should be checked as

soon as possible. Top up the oil page 224 at the next opportunity.

Oil level sensor faulty*

If the yellow warning lamp flashes, take the vehicle to a specialised work-

shop to have the oil level sensor checked. Until then it is advisable to check

the oil level every time you refuel.

Cruise control system*

The warning lamp comes on when the cruise control system

is switched on.

The warning lamp lights up when the cruise control system is switched on.

For further information on the cruise control system, see page 183.

Indicator for open door

This warning lamp ligh

is open.

The warning light should

The system also works when

approx. 15 seconds after the

Electromechanical stee

For vehicles with power steer

the vehicles speed and on th

The warning lamp should ligh

switched on. It should go out

If the battery is disconnected

running. The warning light on

There is a fault in the electrom

go out or lights up whilst the

appear in two different colou

cates a minor fault. If it lights

the steering assistance is no

driving. Stop the vehicle and

does not work if the battery i

towing). You should take into

power than normal to steer th

correctly or at all.

For those vehicles fitted with

manoeuvre is included. See

16) Depending on the model version.

Cockpit86

ABS, EDL and TCS. This also includes the brake

c cleaning of the brake discs and the trailer

ollowing functions:

P is activated when driving.

y if there is a malfunction in the ESP.

lt should occur in the ABS because the ESP

he ABS.

ts up and stays on after the engine is started,

l system has temporarily switched off the ESP.

ctivated by switching the ignition off and then

goes out, this means the system is fully func-

ion about the disconnection status of the

disconnected after pressing the switch.

DL)*

the ABS in vehicles equipped with an

ramme (ESP)*

icated by the ABS warning lamp . Take the

hop as soon as possible. For further informa-

90, Electronic differential lock (EDL)*.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 86 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Emission control system*

This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.

Warning lamp flashes:

When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce

speed and drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop to have the

engine checked.

The instrument panel displays the following message17): EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP

Warning lamp is lit:

If a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the

exhaust gas (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to

the nearest specialised workshop to have the engine checked.

The following message is shown in the instrument panel display: EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP.

Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)* /

There are two warning lamps for the electronic stability

programme. The lamp provides information concerning

the function and the provides information on the discon-

nection status

Both lamps come on together when the ignition is switched on and should go

out after approx. 2 seconds, which is how long the function check lasts.

This programme includes the

assist system (BAS), automati

stability programme (TSP).

The warning lamp has the f

It flashes when the TCS/ES

It will light up continuousl

It will also come on if a fau

operates in conjunction with t

If the ESP warning lamp ligh

this may mean that the contro

In this case the ESP can be rea

on again. If the warning lamp

tional.

The lamp provides informat system:

It stays lit when the TCS is

Differential lock fault (E

EDL operates along with

Electronic Stability Prog

A malfunction in the EDL is ind

vehicle to a specialised works

tion on the EDL see page 1

17) Depending on the model version.

Cockpit 87

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

* Safe

hes if an unauthorised key is used.

hat deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-

erted into the ignition. The immobiliser will be

y as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition

s the following message18): SAFE. The vehicle

page 171.

started if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine

icle can only be ensured if genuine SEAT keys

ion.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 87 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Traction control system (TCS)* /

The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from

spinning when the vehicle is accelerating

There are two warning lamps for the traction control system: and . Both

lamps come on together when the ignition is switched on and should go out

after approx. 2 seconds, which is how long the function check lasts.

The lamp has the following function:

It flashes when the TCS is on, and the vehicle is moving.

If the system is deactivated or if it has any fault, the warning lamp will remain

lit. It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper-

ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information, see page 187,

Brakes

The lamp provides information about the disconnection status of the system:

It stays lit when the TCS is disconnected after pressing the TCS OFF switch.

By pressing again, TCS function is reactivated and the warning lamp switched

off.

Operating the foot brake

The brake pedal must be depressed when this warning lamp lights up. This is

necessary when the automatic gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the

positions P or N.

Electronic immobiliser

This warning lamp flas

Inside the key there is a chip t

matically when the key is ins

activated again automaticall

lock.

The instrument panel display

cannot be used in that case

The engine can, however, be

key is used.

Note A perfect operation of the veh

are used.

18) Depending on the model vers

Steering wheel controls88

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 88 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Steering wheel controls

General information

The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible

to control the audio, telephone and radio navigation functions, as well as the

automatic gears*, without needing to distract the driver.

There are two versions of the multifunction module:

Audio version, to control the available audio functions from the steering

wheel.

Audio + Telephone version, to control the available audio functions and

the telephone system from the steering wheel.

Both versions may be used to control the Audio system (Radio, Audio CD,

mp3 CD, iPod19)/USB19)/SD19)) and the Radio navigation system, in which

case they also control the Navigation system.

Version for automatic gearbox*. page 178

19) If fitted in the vehicle.

Steering wheel controls 89

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

Fig. 52 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)

AUXa)

Volume up

Volume down

No specific function

No specific function

No specific function

Silence

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 89 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Audio system

Steering wheel audio version controls

Fig. 51 Controls on the steering wheel

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod*

Volume up Volume up

Volume down Volume down

Search for next station Next track

Hold down: Fast forward

Search for last station Previous track

Hold down: Rewind

No specific function No specific function

Silence Pause

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

Steering wheel controls90

Operates on instrument panel display

No specific functiona)

Operates on instrument panel display

No specific functiona)

No specific function

Change menu on instrument panel

No specific function

Change menu on instrument panel

Operates on instrument panel

Change source

Operates on instrument panel

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 90 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

b) Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display

Next preset a) Next track a)

b) Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display

Previous preset a) Previous track a)

b) Next preset Change folder

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

b) Previous preset Change folder

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel

b) Change source Change source

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel

a) Only if the panel is in Audio menu. b) Depending on the model version

AG

AH

AI

AJ

AK

AL

Steering wheel controls 91

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

Fig. 54 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)

TELEPHONE

up Volume up

down Volume down

function No specific function

function No specific function

ne menu on

t panel

Make call

Accept incoming call

End call

Hold down: reject incoming

call

ecognition Enable voice recognition

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 91 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls

Fig. 53 Controls on the steering wheel

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX

Volume up Volume up Volume

Volume down Volume down Volume

Search for next station Next track

Hold down: Fast forward No specific

Search for last station Last track

Hold down: Rewind No specific

Access telephone menu on instrument

panel

Access telephone menu on instrument

panel

Access telepho

instrumen

Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice r

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

Steering wheel controls92

unction

Movement on telephone menu

Address book / Last calls /

Calls received / Missed calls

unction

Movement on telephone menu

Address book / Last calls /

Calls received / Missed calls

instrument

l

Change menu on instrument

panel

instrument

l

Change menu on instrument

panel

ument panel Confirm

ument panel Return to MULTIFUNCTION DIS-

PLAY menu

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 92 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Next preset a) Next track a) No specific f

Previous preset a) Previous track a) No specific f

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on

pane

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on

pane

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr

a) Only if the instrument panel is in Audio menu.

AG

AH

AI

AJ

AK

AL

Steering wheel controls 93

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

Fig. 56 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)

NAVIGATOR TELEPHONE

Volume up Volume up

Volume down Volume down

specific function No specific function

specific function No specific function

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 93 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Radio navigation system

Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls

Fig. 55 Controls on the steering wheel

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX

Volume up Volume up Volume up

Volume down Volume down Volume down

Search for next station Next track

Hold down: Fast forward No specific function No

Search for last station Previous track

Hold down: Rewind No specific function No

AA

AB

AC

AD

Steering wheel controls94

pecific function

Accept incoming call

(press briefly)

Reject incoming call

(press and hold down)

End ongoing call /estab-

lish call (press briefly)

Switch to private mode

(press and hold down)

Redial last number (press

and hold down)a)

ion of voice recog-

n for mobile tele-

connected to the

(if the telephone

s function) / MUTE

Activation of voice recog-

nition for mobile tele-

phone connected to the

system (if the telephone

has this function) / MUTE

tes on instrument

panel

Operates on instrument

panel / No specific func-

tion

tes on instrument

panel

Operates on instrument

panel / No specific func-

tion

pecific function Change menu on instru-

ment panel

pecific function Change menu on instru-

ment panel

tes on instrument

panel

Operates on instrument

panel / No specific func-

tion

tes on instrument

panel

Operates on instrument

panel / No specific func-

tion

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 94 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

No specific function No specific function No specific function No s

Activation of voice recogni-

tion for mobile telephone

connected to the system (if

the telephone has this func-

tion) / MUTE

Activation of voice recognition

for mobile telephone con-

nected to the system (if the tel-

ephone has this function) /

MUTE

Activation of voice recog-

nition for mobile tele-

phone connected to the

system (if the telephone

has this function) / MUTE

Activat

nitio

phone

system

has thi

Next preset b) Next track b) No specific function Opera

Previous preset b) Previous track b) No specific function Opera

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instru-

ment panel No s

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instru-

ment panel No s

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument

panel

Opera

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument

panel

Opera

AE

AF

AG

AH

AI

AJ

AK

AL

Steering wheel controls 95

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

edia System 2.1)

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 95 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

a) For a more detailed description of how to use this button, please refer to the Radio navigation System User Handbook (SEAT M b) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.

Unlocking and locking96

04, fig. 62 on the remote control to lock all

urn the key in the door to lock all doors and the

sabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- to leave the vehicle and not manage on their

ay in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle y high and low temperatures, depending on g serious injuries/illness. It could even have d lock both the tailgate and all the other doors ehicle.

with you when you leave the vehicle. Misuse hildren, may result in serious damage and

ntally be started and be out of control.

ed on, the electric equipment could be acti- or example, in the electric windows.

d using the remote control key. This could n emergency situation.

th you when you leave the vehicle.

m the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The engage, and you would not be able to turn the

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 96 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Unlocking and locking

Central locking

Basic functions

The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all

doors by just pushing the button.

Description

Central locking can be activated by using any of the following options:

the key, by inserting it into the driver door cylinder and rotating it manu-

ally,

the central locking button in the vehicle interior page 99.

the radio frequency remote control, using the buttons on the key,

page 104

Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:

Safe locking system

Selective unlocking system*

Automatic speed-dependent locking and unlocking system*

Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking

Emergency unlocking system

Unlocking the vehicle*

Press button page 104, fig. 62 on the remote control to unlock all

the doors and tailgate.

Locking the vehicle*

Press button page 1

doors and the tailgate or t

tailgate.

WARNING

Never leave children or di gency, they may not be able own.

Never allow children to pl can be subjected to extremel the time of year, thus causin fatal consequences. Close an when you are not using the v

Always take you car keys of the keys, for example, by c accident.

The engine may accide

If the ignition is switch vated with risk of injury, f

The doors can be locke make the aid difficult in a

Always take the key wi

Never remove the key fro steering lock could suddenly steering wheel.

Unlocking and locking 97

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

en the vehicle is locked

n on the remote control twice within

cle is locked without activating the dead-

arning lamp flashes for approx. two

s out. After approx. 30 seconds it starts

nd opened from the inside if the Safe deadlock

ill have to pull the door release lever once.

tion is off, the anti-theft alarm* remains active.

g system* and the anti-tow system are deacti-

vehicle if the anti-tow system deadlock mech- is not possible to open the doors from the ake it more difficult to assist vehicle occu- ent. People could become trapped inside in an

stem*

cking either just the driver door or the

ss the unlock button on the remote once. The

is deactivated, only the driver door is unlocked

arning lamp are also turned off.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 97 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Note While the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the

remote control. This avoids the user from forgetting his key inside the vehicle.

If the driver door is unlocked with the key shaft, only the driver door is

unlocked, the rest of the doors remain locked. When the ignition is switched

on, the door deadlock function is deactivated (although the doors remain

locked) and the central locking button is activated. See page 99.

If the central locking or anti-theft alarm are faulty, the driver door warning

lamp remains lit for approx. 30 seconds after locking the vehicle.

For anti-theft security, only the driver door is fitted with a lock cylinder.

Safe security system

The Safe deadlock makes it more difficult to break into the

vehicle because the door release lever and the central locking

button are not active (depending upon country).

Activating deadlock

Press once the locking button on the remote control. or

Turn the key once in the driver door lock to lock. A warning lamp

in the driver door flashes to indicate the Safe deadlock is

working. The warning lamp flashes for approx. two seconds at

short intervals and then more slowly.

Deactivating deadlock wh

Press the locking butto

two seconds. The vehi

lock. The driver door w

seconds and then goe

flashing again.

The doors can be unlocked a

has not been activated. You w

When the Safe deadlock func

The vehicle interior monitorin

vated*.

WARNING

Nobody should remain in the anism has been activated. It inside. Locked doors could m pants in the event of an accid emergency.

Selective unlocking sy

This system allows unlo

entire vehicle.

Using the remote control, pre

Safe system for all the vehicle

and both the alarm and the w

Unlocking and locking98

m for involuntary unlocking*

and prevents the unintentional

.

any of the doors (including the tailgate) are

gets re-locked automatically. This function

aining unlocked if the unlock button is pressed

stem

ing an accident, the vehicle is unlocked, except

It is possible to lock the vehicle from inside

turning the ignition off and back on again.

m the outside, see Emergency locking of the

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 98 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Unlocking all doors and the luggage compartment

The unlock button on the remote control must be pressed twice so that all

doors and the luggage compartment can be opened.

Press twice within 2 seconds to deactivate the Safe system for the entire

vehicle, to unlock all doors and to use the luggage compartment. The warning

lamp and the alarm (only vehicles fitted with one) are turned off.

Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*

This is a safety system which prevent the access to the vehicle

from the outside when it is running (for example, when

stopped at a traffic light).

Locking

The doors and the tailgate are automatically locked when vehicle speed

exceeds 15 km/h.

If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened, when the vehicle

moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h, the unlocked door(s) will

be locked once more.

Unlocking

The driver door automatically unlocks when the key is removed from the igni-

tion.

Each door can be unlocked and opened independently from the inside (for

example, when a passenger gets out of it). To do it, simply operate the lever

inside the door.

WARNING

The door handles must not be operated when the vehicle is running: the door would open.

Automatic locking syste

It is an anti-theft system

unlocking of the vehicle

If the vehicle is unlocked and

opened within 30 seconds, it

prevents the vehicle from rem

by mistake.

Emergency unlocking sy

If the airbags are triggered dur

for the luggage compartment.

with the central locking, after

If the doors must be locked fro

doors

Unlocking and locking 99

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

nt passenger door cannot be locked if any of the

gate) are open. This avoids the user from forget-

.

e central locking will deactivate the central

s. Once this time has passed, the button if oper-

ng the key inside the vehicle if the vehicle is

button when the driver door is closed and any of

ng any of the rear doors, the vehicle locks and

parately from inside the vehicle. Do this by

r once.

hildren and disabled people may be trapped

n is not operative in the following cases:

d from the outside (with the remote control or

activated after unlocking the door lock cylinder

tton .

ton .

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 99 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Central locking button

The central locking button allows you to lock and unlock the

vehicle from the inside.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button .

Unlocking the doors

Press button .

The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.

Except when the Safe security system is activated.

Please note the following if you lock your vehicle with the central locking

button:

For safety reasons it is not possible to open the doors or the tailgate from

the outside (for instance, when stopped at a traffic light).

The driver door and/or fro

vehicle doors (except the tail

ting his key inside the vehicle

Repeated operation of th

locking button for 30 second

ative again.

There is a danger of leavi

locked by the central locking

the rear doors open. On closi

the keys remain inside it.

All doors can be locked se

pulling the door release leve

WARNING

If the vehicle is locked, c inside it.

The central locking butto

When the vehicle is locke the key).

While the ignition is not with the key.

Note Vehicle locked, amber bu

Vehicle unlocked, red but

Fig. 57 Detailed view of the centre console: central locking button

Unlocking and locking100

ing

l locking of the doors in case of

ailure.

ally

cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for

ti-clockwise for the right hand side door.

d it can no longer be opened from the outside.

f the remaining doors

cap fig. 58 printed with a lock image.

ent with a groove in the centre. Insert the key

element clockwise for the right hand side doors

hand side doors.

door. Once the door has been closed it can no

tside.

Fig. 58 Locking the doors manually

AA

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 100 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Unlocking and locking - Manual personalisation

Activating selective unlocking

With the driver door open, turn the key to unlock for approx. 3 s

Deactivating selective unlocking

With the driver door open, turn the key to lock for approx. 3 s

The turn signal lamps flash to confirm activation or deactivation.

Activation of automatic locking

Press the lock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.

Deactivation of automatic locking

Press the unlock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.

The lock button lamp flashes to confirm activation or deactivation.

Emergency manual lock

This permits mechanica

central locking system f

Locking the driver door manu

Insert the key in the door lock

the left hand side door and an

Once the door has been close

Manual (emergency) locking o

Open the door and remove the

This will expose a circular elem

into the groove and rotate the

and anticlockwise for the left

Replace the cap and close the

longer be opened from the ou

Unlocking and locking 101

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

vents the rear doors from being

. This system prevents minors from

tally while the vehicle is running.

Fig. 59 Childproof lock on the left hand side door

Fig. 60 Childproof lock on the right hand side door

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 101 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Unlocking the manually (emergency) locked driver door

Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate anti-clockwise for the left

hand side doors and clockwise for the right hand side doors.

The door lock is released and the door may be opened using the exterior door

handle.

Unlocking the remaining manually (emergency) locked doors

First the driver door must be unlocked to gain entry to the vehicle. Operate the

internal door handle for the required door. If the childproof lock is activated

on the rear doors, when the interior door release lever is operated the door is

unlocked but does not open. The door must be opened from the outside.

Note Once the vehicle is open, if you wish to lock it manually (emergency locking),

repeat the previous instructions.

Childproof lock

The childproof lock pre

opened from the inside

opening a door acciden

Unlocking and locking102

a remote control, a key without a

stic key tab*

our vehicle consists of the following items:

fig. 61 with folding key bit,

ntrol ,

, go to an Authorised Service Centre with your

Fig. 61 Set of keys

AA

AB

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 102 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and

locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activated

and deactivated manually, as described below:

Activating the childproof lock

Unlock the vehicle and open the door in which you wish to acti-

vate the childproof lock.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-

tion key, clockwise for the left hand side doors, and anti-clock-

wise for the right hand side doors page 101, fig. 59

page 101, fig. 60.

Deactivating the childproof lock

Unlock the vehicle and open the door whose childproof lock you

want to deactivate.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-

tion key, clockwise for the right hand side doors, and anti-clock-

wise for the left hand side doors page 101, fig. 59

page 101, fig. 60.

Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the

outside. The childproof lock can be activated and deactivated by inserting the

key in the groove when the door is open, as described above.

Keys

Set of keys

The set of keys includes

remote control and a pla

The set of keys belonging to y

one remote control key

one key without remote co

a plastic key tab* .

Duplicate keys

If you need a replacement key

vehicle identification number.

AC

Unlocking and locking 103

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 103 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

WARNING

An incorrect use of the keys can cause serious injuries.

Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their own.

An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could make the aid difficult in an emergency situation.

Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.

Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steering could suddenly block and it would be impossible to turn the steering wheel.

Caution There are electronic components in the remote control key. Avoid wetting and

hitting the keys

Unlocking and locking104

row) on the control, the key blade is released.

g. 62 .

62 .

utton fig. 62 until all the turn signals

hen the unlocking button is pressed,

e door. Once this time has passed, it will lock

the key fig. 62, will flash.

and the batteries are integrated in the key. The

The maximum range depends on different

as the batteries start to lose power.

, is pressed once, the driver door is

cked.

twice to unlock all doors.

Fig. 63 Range of the remote control

A1

A2

A3

A3

A1

A1

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 104 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Radio frequency remote control

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

The remote control key is used to lock and unlock the vehicle

from a distance.

Using the button fig. 62 (ar

Unlocking the vehicle fi

Locking the vehicle fig.

Unlocking the tailgate. Press b

on the vehicle flash briefly. W

you have 2 minutes to open th

again.

Also, the battery indicator on

The remote control transmitter

receiver is inside the vehicle.

factors. The range is reduced

Selective unlocking*

When the button fig. 62

unlocked, all others remain lo

Press the button fig. 62

Fig. 62 Assignment of buttons on the remote control key

Unlocking and locking 105

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ot flash when the buttons are pushed, the

eries may damage the radio frequency remote

ys replace the dead battery with another of the

nvironment sed of at an appropriate waste facility or

e, given that their components can affect the

ote control key

lock or lock the door with the remote

synchronised.

04, fig. 62 button on the remote control.

using the key bit within one minute.

could no longer be opened and closed with the

is repeatedly pressed outside of the effective

emote control. The remote control key will have

e available in your Authorised Service Centres,

to the locking system.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 105 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

WARNING

An improper use of the key can cause serious injuries.

Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their own.

Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. Otherwise, this could result in serious injuries, accidents or even the theft of your vehicle. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.

An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The vehicle can be locked when using the remote control key. This could complicate the aid in case of emergency.

Note The remote control can be programmed by means of pressing the

unlocking button once; as a result, only the driver door will unlock. When the

button is pressed once more, all doors and the tailgate will be unlocked.

The remote control functions only when you are in range page 104,

fig. 63 (red area).

If the vehicle is unlocked using the button, it will lock again auto-

matically if any of the doors or the tailgate are not opened within 30 seconds

after unlocking it. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked

if the unlock button is pressed by mistake.

If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed using the remote control, the

remote control key will have to be re-synchronised page 105.

Changing the battery

If the battery indicator does n

battery must be replaced.

Caution The use of inappropriate batt

control. For this reason, alwa

same size and power.

For the sake of the e Used batteries must be dispo

through an authorised servic

environment.

Synchronising the rem

If it is not possible to un

control, it should be re-

Press the page 1

Then close the vehicle

It is possible that the vehicle

remote control if the button

range of the radio frequency r

to be resynchronised.

Spare remote control keys ar

where they must be matched

A1

Unlocking and locking106

lly (emergency opening)

fails, you will have to use the key to unlock the

s:

the button shown by the (arrow).

oor to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm

alarm is not triggered immediately.

in 15 seconds. When the ignition is switched

recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates

you do not switch on the ignition within 15

d.

via the unlocking button of the remote control

the ignition lock.

, another monitored area is accessed (e.g. the

r has been opened), the alarm is triggered

s active even if the battery is disconnected or

ediately if one of the battery cables is discon-

is active.

nction incorporated in the anti-theft

authorized vehicle entry by means of

ensors, 2 emitters and a receptor.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 106 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Up to eight remote control keys can be used.

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description of anti-theft alarm system*

The anti-theft alarm triggers if unauthorised movements are

detected around the vehicle.

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal

it. Audible and visible alarms are triggered if the vehicle is opened using the

key, or if unauthorised access to the vehicle is forced.

The anti-theft alarm system is automatically connected on locking the

vehicle. The system is then primed.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are carried

out when the vehicle is locked:

Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the vehicle key

Opening a door

Opening the bonnet

Opening the tailgate

Switching on the ignition

Movements in the vehicle interior

Undue manipulation of the alarm

Battery handling

The acoustic signals sound and the turn signals flash for approx. 30 seconds.

This may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.

Opening the doors mechanica

If the remote control function

vehicle. This is done as follow

Unfold the key by pressing

Use the lock on the driver d

system remains active, but an

Switch on the ignition with

on, the electronic immobiliser

the anti-theft alarm system. If

seconds, the alarm is triggere

How to switch the alarm off

When the vehicle is unlocked

or when the key is inserted in

Note If, after the alarm goes off

tailgate is opened after a doo

again.

Vehicle monitoring remain

not working for any reason.

The alarm is triggered imm

nected while the alarm system

Volumetric sensor*

Monitoring or control fu

alarm* which detects un

ultrasound.

The system consists of 3 s

Unlocking and locking 107

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 107 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Activation

It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the

vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the button

on the remote control is used.

Deactivation

Press the button on the remote control twice. Only the volu-

metric sensor is deactivated. The alarm system remains acti-

vated.

WARNING

The Safe security system remains deactivated if the volumetric sensor is deactivated.

For those vehicles in which a separation screen is fitted, the alarm will not function correctly due to interference with the sensor.

Note If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indi-

cated by a flashing of the indicator on the driver door. This flashing will be

different to that for an activated alarm.

Unlocking and locking108

r and lift the tailgate fig. 64. The tail-

lly open.

of the two handles on the interior lining

ightly.

erate depending on the situation of the vehicle.

cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked

erative and the tailgate may be opened.

on or the button on the remote control

rument panel if the tailgate is open or not prop-

ing signal is also given if the tailgate is opened

ster than 6 km/h.*

Fig. 65 Detail of the inside of the tailgate: hand grip

A1

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 108 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Tailgate

Unlocking and locking

The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric. It is

activated by using the handle on the tailgate

Opening the tailgate

Pull on the release leve

gate will be automatica

Closing the tailgate

Hold the tailgate by one

and close it, pushing sl

The system may or may not op

If the tailgate is locked then it

then the opening system is op

To lock/unlock, press the butt

key.

A warning appears on the inst

erly closed.* An acoustic warn

while the vehicle is moving fa

Fig. 64 Tailgate: opening from the outside

Unlocking and locking 109

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

to be opened if the central locking

xample, if the battery is flat)

gage compartment allowing access to the

anism.

inside the luggage compartment

oove and unlock the locking system,

ght to left, as shown by the arrow

Fig. 66 Tailgate: emer- gency open

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 109 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

WARNING

Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.

The tailgate must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the tail lights

Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury!

Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unex- pectedly while driving.

If the tailgate is not fully closed, open it with the handle and close it again correctly. Do not try to close it by pressing on the surface of the tail- gate, as this may damage the surface.

Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle.

Closing the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the tailgate.

Never drive with the tailgate open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!

If you only open the tailgate, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle will not be opened if the key is left inside.

Emergency opening

This allows the vehicle

does not operate (for e

There is a groove in the lug

emergency opening mech

Opening the tailgate from

Insert the key in the gr

turning the key from ri

fig. 66.

Unlocking and locking110

t left door

t right door

ting the electric window buttons in the rear

left door

right door

door can be used to disable the electric

ors.

ttons on rear doors are activated.

s on rear doors are deactivated.

ic windows can result in injury.

ithout observing and ensuring it is clear, to do s injury to you and third parties. Make sure window.

ey with you when you leave the vehicle.

sabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if An uncontrolled use of the key could start the c equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing n be locked using the remote control key. This n an emergency situation.

work until the key has been removed from the doors has been opened.

ty switch to disable the rear electric windows. en disabled.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 110 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Windows

Opening or closing the windows electrically

The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using

the controls on the driver door.

Opening and closing the windows

Press the button to open the window.

Pull button to close the window .

Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended

.

You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off

the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been

opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.

Buttons on the driver door

Button for window in fron

Button for window in fron

Buttons for rear windows*

Safety switch for deactiva

doors

Button for window in rear

Button for window in rear

Safety switch *

Safety switch on the driver

window buttons in the rear do

Safety switch not pressed: bu

Safety switch pressed: button

WARNING

Incorrect use of the electr

Never close the tailgate w otherwise could cause seriou that no one is in the path of a

Always take the vehicle k

Never leave children or di they have access to the keys. engine or activate any electri risk of accident. The doors ca could make the aid difficult i

The electric windows will ignition and one of the front

If necessary, use the safe Make sure that they have be

Fig. 67 Detail of the driver door: controls for the front and rear windows

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A3

Unlocking and locking 111

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ork when the ignition has been switched off,

on.

e function will not work if the battery has been

if the battery is flat. The function then has to be

oll-back function will not work if there is a

ndows. Contact a specialised workshop.

ll-back function. This reduces the risk

dows are closing.

when closing automatically, the window stops

ediately .

mediately (within 10 seconds) why the window

tempting to close it again. After 10 seconds the

sumes.

ucted, the window will stop at this point.

on why the window cannot be closed, try to

ds.

seconds, the window will open fully when you

ne-touch closing is reactivated.

oll-back function will not work if there is a

ndows. Contact a specialised workshop.

tric windows can result in injury.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 111 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Note If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc-

tion, the window will automatically open again page 111. If this happens,

check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it

again.

One-touch opening and closing

One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to

hold down the button.

One-touch closing

Pull up the window button briefly up to the second position. The

window closes fully.

One-touch opening

Push down the window button briefly up to the second position.

The window opens fully.

Restoring one-touch opening and closing

Close all windows.

Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in

the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function

is now ready for operation.

The buttons page 110, fig. 67 and have two levels for opening the

window and two for closing it. This makes it easier to open and close windows

to the desired position.

One-touch closing does not w

even if the key is in the igniti

The automatic open and clos

temporarily disconnected, or

reactivated.

The one-touch function and r

malfunction in the electric wi

Roll-back function

The windows have a ro

of injuries when the win

If a window is obstructed

at this point and lowers imm

If this happens, check im

could not be closed before at

normal automatic function re

If the window is still obstr

If there is no obvious reas

close it again within 5 secon

If you wait longer than 5 - 10

operate one of the buttons. O

The one-touch function and r

malfunction in the electric wi

WARNING

Incorrect use of the elec

A1 A2

Unlocking and locking112

the remote control for about 3 seconds.

tion electrically will be either opened or

to interrupt the function.

ompletely closed, the turn signals will

roof*

e sliding/tilting sunroof

of is opened and closed using the

nition is switched on.

Fig. 68 Roof lining description: sliding/tilting sunroof rotary knob

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 112 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left alone inside the vehicle.

The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.

Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.

Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.

Note The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the

outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing

page 112.

Convenience opening and closing*

Using the door lock

Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the

locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either

opened or closed.

Release the key to interrupt this function.

Using the remote control

Push the lock button on

All windows which func

closed.

Press the unlock button

Once the windows are c

flash.

Sliding/tilting sun

Opening and closing th

The sliding/tilting sunro

rotary knob when the ig

WARNING (continued)

Unlocking and locking 113

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

isabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if s. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric of accident! The doors can be locked using the ld make the aid difficult in an emergency situ-

of continues to function until one of the front removed from the ignition.

or lock of the driver door in the locking

ng/tilting sunroof is closed.

rrupt this function.

n the remote control for about 3 seconds.

roof is closed.

tton to interrupt the function.

g sunroof has closed completely, the turn

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 113 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof

Turn the rotary button to position fig. 68 .

Opening the sliding/tilting sunroof

Turn the rotary button to position . The sunroof opens to the

convenience position where wind noise is reduced.

To open the roof further, turn the switch to position and hold

the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired

position.

Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof

Turn the rotary button to position .

Always close the sliding/tilting sunroof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it

unattended .

The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about 10 minutes after

the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front

passenger door are not opened.

Sun visor

The sun visor is opened together with the sliding/tilting sunroof. If required,

it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.

Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without checking there are no obstructions, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.

Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

Never leave children or d they have access to the key the engine is started or that sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk remote control key. This cou ation.

The sliding/tilting sunro doors is opened and the key

Convenience closing*

Using the door lock

Hold the key in the do

position until the slidi

Release the key to inte

Using the remote control

Push the lock button o

The sliding/tilting sun

Release the unlock bu

When the sliding/tiltin

signals flash once.

AA

AB

AC

AD

WARNING (continued)

Unlocking and locking114

a roll-back function which prevents larger

the roof is closed. The roll-back function does

ched against the roof opening. The

nd opens again immediately if it is obstructed

s been opened again by the roll-back function,

ng the rotary button at the front in position

ing sunroof has closed fully. Please note that hout the roll-back function.

eakdown

nroof may be closed manually.

y inserting a screwdriver in the rear section.

cover fastening, insert it in the opening as far

the spring) and close the sliding roof.

tion.

Fig. 70 Emergency closing handle

AA

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 114 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Note The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary knob remains in the last position selected if

the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle and will

have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.

Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting sunroof*

The sliding/tilting sunroof has

objects getting trapped when

not prevent fingers getting pin

sliding/tilting sunroof stops a

when closing.

If the sliding/tilting sunroof ha

it can be closed only by pressi

fig. 69 until the sliding/tilt

the sunroof will now close wit

Operation in the event of a br

In case of a breakdown, the su

Remove the plastic cover b

Remove the lever from the

as possible (pushing against

Fit the lever back into posi

Fig. 69 Roof lining description: sliding/tilting sunroof rotary knob

Lights and visibility 115

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ts*

osition or to the first stop. The

switch lights up.

lights (vehicles with front fog lights)

osition or to the second stop

lights up in the instrument panel.

lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)

m position to the last stop. A warning

strument panel.

lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights are ate the road ahead and to ensure that other u. Always use your dipped beam headlights if

or.

hts will only work with the ignition on. The side

when the ignition is turned off.

r the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,

d while the driver door remains open. This is a

off.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 115 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Lights and visibility

Lights

Switching lights on and off

Switching on the side lights

Turn the light switch fig. 71 to position .

Switching on dipped beam headlights

Turn the light switch to position .

Switching off the lights

Turn the light switch to position 0.

Switching on the fog ligh

Pull the switch out of p

symbol in the light

Switching on the rear fog

Pull the switch out of p

. A warning lamp

Switching on the rear fog

Pull the light switch fro

lamp lights up in the in

WARNING

Never drive with just the side not bright enough to illumin road users are able to see yo it is dark or if visibility is po

Note The dipped beam headlig

lights come on automatically

If the lights are left on afte

an acoustic warning will soun

reminder to switch the lights

Fig. 71 Detailed view of the dash panel: lights, fog lights and rear fog light switch

Lights and visibility116

0.

is switched on, dipped beam headlights are

a photosensor if you drive into a tunnel, for

e dipped beam headlights when the wind-

ating continuously for a few seconds and it

e continuous or intermittent wipe is switched

128.

ght control is connected but the dipped lights

lights up on the light control fig. 72. If the

the dipped lights, the instrument and control

dlight control is switched on, the dipped ed on with fog. Therefore, the dipped beam ly.

automatic headlight system, when the key is

acoustic signal will only sound if the light

r if the vehicle is not fitted with the coming

matic light function is switched on, the fog

be switched on in addition.

cribed here is subject to the relevant statutory

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 116 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You

should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.

If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with

a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the vehicle will automati-

cally be switched off.

The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory

requirements.

Depending on weather conditions (very cold or wet), the front and tail

lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has no influence

on the useful life of the lighting system. The lights will soon demist when they

are switched on.

Automatic lighting*

Activation

Rotate the switch to the position Auto, this indication will light

up.

Deactivation

Turn the light switch to

Automatic lighting

If automatic headlight control

automatically switched on by

example.

The rain sensor switches on th

screen wipers have been oper

switches the lights off when th

off for some minutes page

When the automatic dipped li

are off, the warning lamp

automatic control switches on

lighting is also switched on.

WARNING

Even if the automatic hea headlights will not be switch must be switched on manual

Note For those vehicles with the

removed from the ignition, the

control is in the position o

home function.

If the daylight driving auto

lights or rear fog light cannot

The use of the lighting des

requirements.

Fig. 72 Automatic lighting

Lights and visibility 117

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ed light in combination with the daytime s)

the daytime lighting are activated at the same

he instrument panel lighting will automatically

entering a tunnel) and the daytime lights will go

ed light control switches off the dipped lights

nel), the daytime lights come back on.

f, move the turn signal and main beam lever

signal and headlamp flash).

conds while holding this position. The daytime

e switched on.

hts

f, move the turn signal and main beam lever

ignal and headlamp flash) and hold in this posi-

conds while holding this position. The daytime

nnot be switched on.

-xenon lamps)

ition, move the turn signal lever upwards (right

wards to flash position and hold it in this posi-

ignition on, holding it in this position for 3

ignition. The daytime lights are activated and

bi-xenon lamps)

ition, move the turn signal lever upwards (left

wards to flash position and hold it in this posi-

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 117 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may

cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system.

To avoid damage to the tail lights, the lights mounted on the tailgate go

off when the tailgate is opened (depending on the country).

Daytime lights*

The daytime light reduces the risk of accidents by increasing

the visibility of the vehicle. The daytime running lights are

enabled automatically when the ignition is switched on. It is

automatically switched off when the side lights are turned on.

Daytime running lights (halogen lamps)20)

The daytime lights increase road safety in vehicles fitted with halogen lamps.

These include the dipped, side and number plate lights.

The daytime lights are switched on each time the ignition is turned on if the

light setting is in position 0 or . Depending upon the model, a control

lamp on the light control switch or the lighting up of the instrument panel

will indicate that the daytime lighting is on.

It is not possible to switch the daytime lights on or off. Please contact a

specialised workshop if you wish to deactivate the lights.

Daytime lights (bi-xenon lamps)

The daytime lights increase road safety in vehicles fitted with bi-xenon lamps.

The lights are built-in separately to the headlights and are switched on each

time the ignition is turned on if the light setting is in position 0 or .

Automatic control of the dipp lighting (bi-xenon headlamp

If the dipped light control and

time, the dipped lights and t

come on as required (e.g. on

off. When the automatic dipp

(e.g. on coming out of the tun

Activating the daytime lights

With the ignition switched of

upwards and back (right turn

Switch on the ignition for 3 se

lights are activated and can b

Deactivating the daytime lig

With the ignition switched of

upwards and back (left turn s

tion.

Switch on the ignition for 3 se

lights are deactivated and ca

Activating daytime lights (bi

Remove the key from the ign

turn signal) and press it back

tion.

Insert the key and switch the

seconds. Then, switch off the

can be switched on.

Deactivating daytime lights (

Remove the key from the ign

turn signal) and press it back

tion. 20) It is only available in some countries or as an optional extra

Lights and visibility118

n.

activated when the vehicle is unlocked if:

ion and

darkness.

itches off in the following cases:

elay in switching off the headlamps has ended

in.

to position .

n.

itching off the headlamps in the Coming Home

n be changed or the function can be connected

ights and visibility page 75.

ed while the lights are on, and the lights are

door opened, no acoustic signal is heard, as

on is on, the lights are automatically switched

pt when the light switch is in position or

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 118 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Insert the key and switch the ignition on, holding it in this position for 3

seconds. Then, switch off the ignition. The daytime lights are deactivated and

cannot be switched on.

Note Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your

country.

Coming home / leaving home function*

The Coming Home function is controlled manually. The

Leaving Home function is controlled with a photosensor.

If the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is connected, the front side

and dipped lights, the tail lights and the number plate light will light up to

provide assistance.

Coming home function

The Coming Home function is activated by switching off the ignition and

briefly flashing the lights. When the driver door is opened, the Coming Home

lighting comes on. If the driver door is already open when the lights are

flashed briefly, the Coming Home lighting comes on immediately.

When the last door of the vehicle or the tailgate is closed, the Coming Home

function starts and the switching off the headlights is delayed.

The Coming Home lighting switches off in the following cases:

On completion of the time period established for the delay in switching off

the lights after all the vehicle doors and the tailgate have been closed.

If, 30 seconds after being connected, any doors or the tailgate remain

open.

If the light switch is turned to position .

If the ignition is switched o

Leaving home function

The Leaving Home function is

the light control is in posit

the photosensor detects

The Leaving Home lighting sw

If the time period for the d

If the vehicle is locked aga

If the light switch is turned

If the ignition is switched o

Note The setting for the delay in sw

and Leaving Home function ca

or disconnected in the menu L

If the ignition key is remov

flashed briefly and the driver

when the Coming Home functi

off after a period of time (exce

.

Lights and visibility 119

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

coming traffic more than necessary. At the same

dlight settings, the driver has the best possible

djusted when the dipped beam is switched on.

humb wheel down from the basic setting 0.

trol

ulbs (xenon bulbs) are equipped with

trol. This means that the headlights will be

of the vehicle and nodding movements when

tomatically compensated for.

ulbs do not have headlight range control.

for driving round bends)

ends, the headlights will light the

f the road.

A2

Fig. 74 Cornering lighting using adaptive headlights

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 119 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control

Instrument and switch lighting

When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and

switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the

thumb wheel fig. 73 .

The instrument lighting (dials and needles), the centre console illumination

and the illumination of the displays are regulated by a photodiode incorpo-

rated in the instrument panel.

The instrument lighting (dials and needles) is switched on when the ignition

is on and the vehicle lights are off. The instrument lighting is dimmed auto-

matically as the daylight starts to fade. It goes out completely when the

ambient light level is very low. This function is intended to remind the driver

to switch on the dipped beam headlights in good time when light conditions

become poor.

Headlight range control

By using the electrical headlight range control, you can adjust the head-

light range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. This way, it is

possible to avoid dazzling on

time, by using the correct hea

lighting for the road ahead.

The headlights can only be a

To lower the beam, turn the t

Dynamic headlight range con

Vehicles with gas discharge b dynamic headlight range con adjusted to suit the load level

pulling off and braking are au

Vehicles with gas discharge b

Adaptive headlights* (

When driving around b

most important areas o

Fig. 73 Dash panel: regu- lation for instrument and switch illumination and headlight range control

A1

A1

A2

A2

Lights and visibility120

ts are used to draw the attention of

vehicle in emergencies.

n:

afe distance from moving traffic.

tch on the hazard warning lights .

ngage 1st gear, and for an automatic

to P.

e to draw the attention of other road users

Fig. 75 Dash panel: switch for hazard warning lights

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 120 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Dynamic cornering lights* (AFS)

The dynamic cornering lights only operate if the vehicle is travelling at more

than 10 km/h and the dipped headlights are on. When taking a bend, the

road is illuminated better with directional gas discharge bulbs than with

conventional fixed headlights.

A fault in the system is indicated via the flashing of the control lamp on the

instrument panel. At the same time, a text message with information or

instructions to perform necessary operations may appear on the instrument

panel display. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault

repaired.

If the control bulb lights up on the instrument panel but all the bulbs are

operating correctly, there may still be a fault in the dynamic curve lighting

system (AFS). Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault

repaired.

WARNING

If the automatic dipped beam control is switched on, the dipped beam headlights will not be switched on in fog. They should be switched on manually using the light switch. The driver is personally responsible for the correct use of lights in all situations. Automatic headlight control is merely a system to support the driver. Where necessary, switch on the lights manually using the light switch.

Hazard warning lights

The hazard warning ligh

other road users to your

If your vehicle breaks dow

1. Park your vehicle at a s

2. Press the button to swi

3. Switch the engine off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. On a manual gearbox e

move the selector lever

6. Use the warning triangl

to your vehicle.

Lights and visibility 121

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ning lights described here is subject to the rele-

eam headlight lever

in beam lever also operates the

headlight flasher.

beam headlight lever has the following

nals

ay up fig. 76 to indicate right, and

indicate left.

Fig. 76 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever

A1

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 121 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

Switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for example

when:

reaching the tail end of a traffic jam,

there is an emergency

your vehicle breaks down due to a technical fault,

you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are

switched on. That is that the two turn signal turn signal lamps and the

turn signal lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The hazard

warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.

Emergency braking warning

If the vehicle is braked suddenly and continuously at a speed of more than 80

km/h, the brake light flashes several times per second to warn vehicles

driving behind. If you continue braking, the hazard warning lights will come

on automatically when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off auto-

matically when the vehicle starts to move again.

WARNING

The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle.

Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with inflammable materials under the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This could start a fire!

Note The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long

time, even if the ignition is switched off.

The use of the hazard war

vant statutory requirements.

Turn signal and main b

The turn signal and ma

parking lights and the

The turn signal and main

functions:

Switching on the turn sig

Move the lever all the w

all the way down toA2

Lights and visibility122

ted to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defec-

at double speed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs

does not light up. Change the bulb.

can only be switched on if the dipped beam

warning lamp then comes on in the instru-

es on for as long as you pull the lever even if

n. The warning lamp then comes on in the

e switched on, the front and rear side lights on

vehicle light up. The parking lights will only

the ignition. If the lights are switched on, an

while the driver door is open.

ft on after the key has been taken out of the

al sounds when the driver door is opened. This

turn signal, unless of course you wish to leave

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 122 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Signalling a lane change

Push the lever up or down to the point where you incur

resistance and then release it. The turn signal will flash several

times. The corresponding indicator lamp will also flash.

Switching main beam on and off

If the dipped lights are on, push the lever forward page 121,

fig. 76 to switch on the main beam.

Push the lever towards the steering wheel page 121, fig. 76

to switch off the main beam.

Headlight flashers

Pull the lever towards the steering wheel to operate the

flasher.

Switching on parking lights

Switch the ignition off and remove the key from the lock.

Move the lever up or down to turn the right or left-hand parking

lights on, respectively.

WARNING

The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other drivers.

Note The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The corre-

sponding warning lamp or flashes in the instrument panel. The warning

lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is

correctly attached and connec

tive, the warning lamp flashes

are damaged, warning lamp

The main beam headlights

headlights are already on. The

ment panel.

The headlight flasher com

no other lights are switched o

instrument panel.

When the parking lights ar

the corresponding side of the

work if the key is removed from

acoustic signal will be emitted

If the turn signal lever is le

ignition lock, an acoustic sign

is a reminder to switch off the

the parking light on.

A1 A2

A3

A4

A4

Lights and visibility 123

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

closed, the interior lights will be switched off

viding the key has been removed and the cour-

his prevents the battery from discharging.

2

ed to select the following positions:

(not activated). The interior lights are automat-

ehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the

20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior

the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is

Fig. 78 Interior roof trim: front interior lights

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 123 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Interior lights

Front interior light type 1

The switch fig. 77 is used to select the following positions:

Courtesy light position

Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lights are automat-

ically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the

ignition. And turn off approx. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior

lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is

switched on.

Interior light switched on

Push the switch to position .

Interior light switched off O

Push the switch to position O fig. 77.

Note If not all the vehicle doors are

after approx. 10 minutes, pro

tesy light position selected. T

Front interior light type

The switch fig. 78 is us

Courtesy light position

Rocker switch in flat position

ically switched on when the v

ignition. And turn off approx.

lights are switched off when

switched on.

Fig. 77 Interior roof trim: front interior lights

AA

AA

Lights and visibility124

t

n fig. 79 and fig. 80 to switch on

ff

n to switch the reading light off.

Fig. 80 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 2

AB AB

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 124 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Interior light switched on

Push the switch to position .

Interior light switched off O

Push the switch to position O page 123, fig. 78.

Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off

after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-

tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.

Front reading lights Switching on the reading ligh

Press the corresponding butto

the reading light.

Switching the reading lights o

Press the corresponding butto

Fig. 79 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 1

Lights and visibility 125

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

closed, the interior lights will be switched off

viding the key has been removed and the cour-

his prevents the battery from discharging.

nd the front passenger can be pulled out of their

vehicle and turned towards the doors fig. 82

isors have covers. When you open the cover ,

Fig. 82 Sun visor on the driver side

A2

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 125 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Rear interior and reading lights*

The switch fig. 81 is used to select the following positions:

Interior light switched off 0

In switch position fig. 81 , the interior and reading lights are switched

off.

Switching on the reading light

Turn the switch to position (left reading light) or to position (right

reading light).

Courtesy light position

Turn the control to position . The interior lights are automatically switched

on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the ignition. The

light turns off about 20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior lights are

switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.

Interior lights or both reading lights switched on

Turn the control to position .

Note If not all the vehicle doors are

after approx. 10 minutes, pro

tesy light position selected. T

Visibility

Sun visors

The sun visors for the driver a

mountings in the centre of the

The vanity mirrors in the sun v

a lamp in the roof lights up.

Fig. 81 Interior roof trim: rear interior lights and reading lights.

AC

A1

A2 A4

A3

A5

A1

Lights and visibility126

s

ver controls the windscreen wipers

and wipe.

r fig. 84 has the following positions:

ion .

sition .

Fig. 84 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever

A0

A1

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 126 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

The light* in the roof lining will go out when the vanity mirror cover is pushed

back or the sun visor is pushed back up.

Note The roof lamp will turn off about 10 minutes following the removal of the igni-

tion key. This prevents the battery from discharging.

Sun blind*

The windows on the rear doors are fitted with a sun blind

Rear door sun blind*

Pull out the visor and hook it onto the hooks at the top of the door

frame fig. 83.

Windscreen wiper

Windscreen wipers

The windscreen wiper le

and the automatic wash

The windscreen wiper leve

Switching off the wipers

Move the lever to posit

Interval wipe

Move the lever up to po

Fig. 83 Rear door sun visor

Lights and visibility 127

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

des reduce visibility and safety levels while

hould not use the wash / wipe system unless creen with the heating and ventilation system. rwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure

onding warnings on page 229, Changing

ck that the wiper blades are not frozen to the

for the first time. If you switch on the wipers

zen to the windscreen, you could damage both

er motor.

ill only work when the ignition is switched on.

cles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will only

and the bonnet closed.

o not go as far as the rest position. When the

they are totally hidden.

automatically be selected if speed page 126,

hen the vehicle stops. The set speed will be

arts again

ed again after approximately five seconds once

stem has been operated, provided the vehicle

you activate the wipers less than three seconds

wash sequence will begin without the last wipe.

k again, you have to turn the ignition off and

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 127 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Move the control to the left or right to set the length of the

intervals. Control to the left: long intervals; control to the right:

short intervals. Four wiper interval stages can be set using switch

.

Slow wipe

Move the lever up to position .

Continuous wipe

Move the lever up to position .

Short wipe

Move the lever down to position to give the windscreen a

short wipe. The wiper will start to move faster if you keep the

lever pressed down for longer than two seconds.

Wash and wipe automatic system

Pull the lever towards the steering wheel - Position . The wash

function will start immediately and the wipers will start with a

slight delay. The wash and wiper systems will function at the

same time at speeds of over 120 km/h.

Release the lever. The wipers will keep running for approximately

four seconds.

Heated windscreen in the wiper blade area*

In some countries and with some versions, there is the possibility of heating

the windscreen in the area of the windscreen wiper blades in order to aid de-

icing in the zone. The function is switched on by pressing the heated rear

window key .

WARNING

Worn and dirty wiper bla driving.

In cold conditions, you s you have warmed the winds The washer fluid could othe your view of the road.

Always note the corresp windscreen wiper blades.

Caution In icy conditions, always che

glass before using the wipers

when the wiper blades are fro

the wiper blades and the wip

Note The windscreen wipers w

In certain versions of vehi

work when the ignition is on

When in use, the wipers d

lever is moved to position 0,

The next speed down will

fig. 84 or is selected w

resumed when the vehicle st

The windscreen will be wip

the automatic wipe/wash sy

is in transit (drip function). If

after the drip function, a new

For the drip function to wor

then on again.

AA

AA

A2

A3

A4

A5

A2 A3

Lights and visibility128

or

iper lever into position fig. 86

the left or right to set the sensitivity of the

he right: highly sensitive. Control to the

nterval wipe function. You will have to switch

witch off the ignition. This is done by switching

and back on.

windscreen in front of the sensor. This may

lts.

Fig. 86 Windscreen wiper lever

A1

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 128 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

When the interval wipe function is on, the intervals are directly propor-

tional to the speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter the

intervals.

The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the windscreen.

The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the

obstacle and switch the wiper back on again.

Before removing any objects that may be trapped in the side areas of the

windscreen, always move the wiper arms to the service position (horizontal).

The heat output of the heated jets is controlled automatically when the

ignition is switched on, depending upon the outside temperature.

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen

wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain.

Switching on the rain sens

Move the windscreen w

Move the control to

rain sensor. Control to t

left: less sensitive.

The rain sensor is part of the i

the rain sensor back on if you s

the wiper interval function off

Note Do not put stickers on the

cause sensor disruption or fau

Fig. 85 Rain sensor*

AA

Lights and visibility 129

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

tic windscreen wiper/washer

wards to position fig. 87. The wash

ediately and the wiper will start with a

creen wash system will function as long as

is position.

wiper then wipes for approximately 4

ntervals again.

washer system stops and the wipers func-

des reduce visibility and safety levels while

onding warnings on page 229, Changing

k that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass

first time. If you switch on the wiper when the

lass, this could damage both the wiper blade

l only function when the ignition is switched on

indscreen wipers switched on, the rear wind-

ipe.

A7

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 129 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Rear window wiper

The windscreen wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper

and the wash and wipe system for the rear window.

Switching on the interval wipe

Press the lever forwards to position fig. 87. The wiper will

wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.

Switching off the interval wipe function

Pull the lever back from position towards the steering wheel.

The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you switch

off whilst the wipers are in motion.

Switching on the automa

Press the lever fully for

function will start imm

slight delay. The winds

you hold the lever in th

Release the lever. The

seconds, and then in i

Release the lever. The

tion.

WARNING

Worn and dirty wiper bla driving.

Always note the corresp windscreen wiper blades.

Caution In icy conditions, always chec

before using the wiper for the

wiper blade is frozen to the g

and the wiper motor.

Note The windscreen wiper wil

and the tailgate is closed.

In reverse gear, with the w

screen wiper will make one w

Fig. 87 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever: rear window wiper

A6

A6

Lights and visibility130

nterior mirror*

le function can be switched on and off

zle function

88. Indicator lamp goes off.

le function

88. The indicator lamp turns on.

ivated every time the ignition is switched on.

s up in the mirror housing.

is enabled, the interior mirror will darken auto- ount of light it receives. The anti-dazzle func-

r is engaged.

Fig. 88 Automatic anti- dazzle interior mirror.

AB

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 130 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Headlight washer*

The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.

The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen

washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering

wheel for at least 1.5 seconds provided the dipped beam headlights or

main beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the

headlights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.

Note

To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the

nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer

spray.

To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to

time, the headlight wipers will be activated every three cycles.

Rear-view mirrors

Interior mirror

It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the

rear window.

Manual anti-dazzle function for interior mirror

In the basic mirror position, the lever at the bottom edge of the mirror should

be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function.

Automatic anti-dazzle i

The automatic anti-dazz

as desired.

Switching off the anti-daz

Press button fig.

Switching on the anti-dazz

Press button fig.

Anti-dazzle function

The anti-dazzle function is act

The green indicator lamp light

When the anti-dazzle function

matically according to the am

tion is cancelled if reverse gea

AA

AA

Lights and visibility 131

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

position the mirror so that you have a

f the vehicle.

(right exterior mirror).

to position the mirror so that you have a

f the vehicle .

rs*

to the central position fig. 89 so

ew mirrors warm up and the heated wind-

ade rest area is activated. page 127

ting is not activated in temperatures

0 C.

s*

89 to position to fold in the exterior

ays fold in the exterior mirrors if you are

omatic car wash. This will help prevent

ith convenience control*

fold back automatically with convenience

te or the key)

n the door and use the contact

ack out to the extended position*

er position to fold the exterior mirrors back

A1

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 131 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Note The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun

blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects

preventing light from reaching the rear view mirror.

If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in

front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from

working well or even from working at all.

Exterior mirrors

The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in

the centre console.

Basic setting of exterior mirrors

1. Turn knob fig. 89 to position L (left exterior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to

good view to the rear o

3. Turn knob to position R

4. Swivel the rotary knob

good view to the rear o

Heating the exterior mirro

Turn the knob forwards

that the heated rear vi

screen* in the wiper bl

The exterior mirror hea

above approximately 2

Folding in exterior mirror

Turn the control fig.

mirrors. You should alw

driving through an aut

damage.

Folding exterior mirrors w

The exterior mirror will

closing (with the remo

To unfold it again, ope

Folding exterior mirrors b

Turn the knob to anoth

out. .

Fig. 89 Controls of exte- rior mirrors

Lights and visibility132

d separately or simultaneously, as described

exterior mirrors is not activated at speeds of

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 132 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Synchronised mirror adjustment

1. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a

good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior mirror will

be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).

WARNING

Convex or aspheric mirrors increase the field of vision however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.

If possible, use the rear view mirror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you.

Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!

For the sake of the environment The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer

needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

Note If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be

adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.

In vehicles with electric exterior mirrors, the following points should be

observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. a knock while manoeuvring), the

adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be

completely folded electrically. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as

this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.

The mirrors can be adjuste

before.

The fold-in function on the

above 40 km/h.

Seats and storage compartments 133

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never , out of the window or on the seat. This is also correct sitting position exposes you to an se of a sudden braking or an accident. If the d sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect

iver and front passenger to keep a distance of ing wheel or dash panel. Failure to respect the at the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal the driver and the steering wheel or between

dash panel should always be as great as

passenger seat only when the vehicle is to the forwards/backwards adjustment of the eat could move unexpectedly while the vehicle

se the risk of an accident and therefore, injury. your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting nts.

to installing a child seat on the front lling a child seat, please observe the warnings hild safety.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 133 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Seats and storage compartments

The importance of correct seat adjustment

Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection

offered by seat belts and airbags.

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is

equipped with a three-point seat belt.

The driver seat and the front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways to

suit the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat

position is very important for:

a fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,

a relaxed posture which does not cause drowsiness,

a safe driving page 7,

ensuring that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum protec-

tion page 19.

WARNING

If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they may sustain critical injuries.

More people than available seats must never be transported in your vehicle.

Every passenger in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro- priate child restraint system page 46, Child safety.

The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and your passengers with optimum protection.

Always keep your feet on rest them on the dash panel applied to passengers. An in increased risk of injury in ca airbag is triggered, you coul sitting position.

It is important for the dr at least 25 cm from the steer minimum distance means th injury. The distance between the front passenger and the possible.

Adjust the driver or front stationary. This also applies rear seats. Otherwise, your s is moving. This could increa In addition, while adjusting position. Risk of fatal accide

Special guidelines apply passenger seat. When insta described in page 46, C

WARNING (continued)

Seats and storage compartments134

nt so that the top is at the same level as

as close as possible to the same level as

least at eye level fig. 90 and fig. 91.

page 135

estraints removed or improperly adjusted njuries.

restraints could lead to death in the event of

restraints also increase the risk of injury driving or braking manoeuvres.

always be adjusted according to the

Fig. 91 Side view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 134 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Head restraints

Correct adjustment of head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of

passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in

most accident situations.

Adjust the head restrai

the top of your head or

the top of your head, at

Adjusting the head restraints

WARNING

Travelling with the head r increases the risk of severe i

Improperly adjusted head a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted head during sudden or unexpected

The head restraints must passengers height.

Fig. 90 Front view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted

Seats and storage compartments 135

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

raint, press the button and push head

d restraint engages securely in one of its

eats)

t forward or back to the required position.

int

t up as far as it will go.

. 92 (arrow).

of fitting without releasing the button.

nt into the guides on the backrest.

wn.

int to suit body size page 14 and

straints have been removed. Risk of injury.

straints are in an unsuitable position, there is

straint, you must always adjust it properly for otection.

y warnings in page 134, Correct adjust-

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 135 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Removing or adjusting head restraints

The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and

down.

Adjusting height (front seats)

Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired

position.

To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head

restraint downwards.

Make sure that it engages securely into position.

Adjusting height (rear seats)

Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired

position.

To lower the head rest

restraint downwards.

Make sure that the hea

positions page 14.

Angle adjustment (front s

Press the head restrain

Removing the head restra

Push the head restrain

Press the button fig

Pull head restraint out

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restrai

Push head restraint do

Adjust the head restra

page 13.

WARNING

Never drive if the head re

Never drive if the head re a risk of serious injury.

After refitting the head re height to achieve optimal pr

Please observe the safet ment of head restraints.

Fig. 92 Adjusting and removing the head restraints

Seats and storage compartments136

angle

backrest and turn the hand wheel.

upport*

backrest and turn the hand wheel to

ort.

, the curvature of the cushioned area of the

or less acute. In this way, it adapts to the

.

front passenger seat while the vehicle is in seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting ts. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat

ionary.

y to the driver and front passenger in case of ent, never drive with the backrest tilted m protection of the seat belt can be achieved n an upright position and the driver and front

usted their seat belts. The further the back- e greater the risk of injury due to improper

curing the seat height into forwards/back- e caused if the seat height is adjusted n.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 136 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Front seats

Adjustment of the front seats

The control elements in fig. 93 are mirrored for the front right-

hand seat.

Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards

Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards.

Then release the grip and move the seat further until the

catch engages.

Adjusting the seat height*

Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from

its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages.

Adjusting the backrest

Take your weight off the

Adjusting the lumbar s

Take your weight off the

adjust the lumbar supp

As you make the adjustments

lumbar region becomes more

natural curvature of the spine

WARNING

Never adjust the driver or motion. While adjusting your position. Risk of fatal acciden only when the vehicle is stat

To reduce the risk of injur a sudden braking or an accid towards the rear. The maximu only when the backrests are i passenger have properly adj rests are tilted to the rear, th positioning of the belt web!

Exercise caution when se wards position. Injuries can b without due care and attentio

Fig. 93 Front left seat controls

A1

A1

A2

A3

A4

Seats and storage compartments 137

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

icles without Climatronic

umb wheel fig. 94 to switch on the seat

ing is switched off in the 0 position.

icles with Climatronic

itch on the seat heating.

heating at maximum level (level 3).

heating at medium level (level 2).

t seat heating at minimum level (level 1).

ssed four times, the heating goes off and

l 0).

hen the ignition is switched on. The left thumb

nd the right thumb wheel the right seat.

g elements, please do not kneel on the seat or

gle point to the seat cushion and backrest.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 137 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Heated seats*

The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electri-

cally.

Front seat heating for veh

Turn the appropriate th

heating. The seat heat

Front seat heating for veh

Press button to sw

Press once to set seat

Press twice to set seat

Press three times to se

When the button is pre

the LED goes out (leve

The seat heating only works w

wheel controls the left seat a

Caution To avoid damaging the heatin

apply sharp pressure at a sin

Fig. 94 Thumb wheel for the front seat heating

Fig. 95 Front seat heating with Climatronic

AA

Seats and storage compartments138

rwards or backwards independently. The

/3 of the seat. There are various possible

unlock the lever in the direction of the

forwards or backwards to the desired

t

top. Pull the loop on the side of the seat

ection of the arrow and hold the loop in

backrest to the required position and

the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, your ly while the vehicle is moving. This could nt and therefore, injury.

down until the seat is moved, this is to avoid .

e moved, is fixed in position.

aximum luggage compartment space, put the

without moving.

aximum space without putting the backrests

to the desired position.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 138 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Rear seats

Seat adjustment

The seats may be moved fo

movement can be 1/3 or 2

positions.

Adjusting reach

In the seated position,

arrow fig. 96.

Move the seat cushion

position.

Backrest angle adjustmen

Hold the backrest at the

fig. 97 in the dir

this position. Push the

release the loop.

WARNING

Adjust the seat only when seat could move unexpected increase the risk of an accide

Do not push the backrests damage to the centre console

Ensure that the seat, onc

Note In order to maintain the m

backrests in position normal,

In order to maintain the m

down, move the seats forward

Fig. 96 For unlocking the rear seat

Fig. 97 Rear seat back- rest angle adjustment

A1

Seats and storage compartments 139

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ackrests down

e of the seat fig. 99 in the direction

e seat backrest into position.

e backrest has engaged properly in position

cking system loops on the seats may not be

ckrest into position ensure that the seat belts

Fig. 99 Folding or opening the front seat backrests

A1

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 139 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Folding the seat backrests down

Pull the loop on the side of the seat fig. 98

In this position the backrest is locked. This is the reason why the loop located

on the side of the seat must be pulled in the direction of the arrow to open the

backrest.

WARNING

You should check that the backrest has engaged properly in position after the loop is released.

For safety reasons the locking system loops on the seats may not be used to secure any items.

Folding the rear seat b

Pull the loop on the sid

of the arrow and lift th

WARNING

You should check that th after the loop is released.

For safety reasons the lo used to secure any items.

After locking the seat ba protrude from the seat.

Fig. 98 Folding or opening the rear seat backrests

A1

Seats and storage compartments140

with storage area

n the armrest.

a, lift the armrest up in the direction of

d then lift the cover.

r* or the lower storage area, pull on the

ressing on the button.

a, push the armrest down.

closed while the vehicle is in motion to the armrest during a sudden braking an accident.

Fig. 101 Front armrest with storage area

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 140 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Storage compartment

Storage compartment on the front passenger side

The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever fig. 100.

WARNING

Always keep the storage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in motion in order to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sudden braking or by an accident.

Centre armrest at front

There is a storage area i

To open the storage are

the arrow fig. 101 an

To access the CD loade

armrest cover without p

To close the storage are

WARNING

Always keep the storage area reduce the risk of injury from manoeuvre or in the event of

Fig. 100 Passenger side: storage compartment

Seats and storage compartments 141

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

aximum weight of 1.5 kg.

wer cover open. There is an injury risk for leased in case of sudden braking or an

to the rear of the front seat backrests.

it up in the direction of the arrow

Fig. 103 Folding tray on the front left seat

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 141 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Note The CD changer is located in this compartment.

Storage areas under the front seats*

There is a storage locker with a cover under each front seat.

The drawer* fig. 102 is opened by pushing the button and putting the

cover back.

There are two open positions of 15 and 60 degrees depending on the pres-

sure applied to the cover. In the 60 degree position, the cover will collapse if

too much pressure is applied.

To close the drawer, press the cover until it locks into position.

WARNING

The drawers will hold a m

Do not drive with the dra passengers if the cargo is re accident.

Folding tray*

Folding trays are fitted

To open the tray, open

fig. 103.

Fig. 102 Storage area under the front seats

AA

Seats and storage compartments142

cover to open these compartments

ill then open.

s it up until it engages.

cover closed while the vehicle is in motion to g a sudden braking manoeuvre or in the event any items from being thrown through the

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 142 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

WARNING

The folding trays may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone is seated on the second row of seats. There is a risk on injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre! The tray must therefore be closed and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in motion.

Never place hot drinks in the cup holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.

Caution When driving, do not leave open cans in the cup holders. The drink might be

spilt on braking, for example, and could damage the vehicle.

Roof storage compartment*

There are four storage compartments in the roof

Press the button on the

fig. 104. The cover w

To close the cover, pres

WARNING

Always keep the storage area reduce the risk of injury durin of an accident and to prevent vehicle interior.

Fig. 104 Roof storage compartments

Seats and storage compartments 143

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

rtment floor and fold it back all the way

fig. 106 into the side grooves depending

ts to be transported. The on-board tool kit

re located underneath the luggage

uggage compartment with suitable straps

um authorised weight for the vehicle

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 143 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Storage in the luggage compartment*

There is a variable storage area* in the luggage compartment

floor.

Lift the luggage compa

fig. 105.

Fit the separator on the size of the objec

and the spare wheel a

compartment.

Secure objects in the l

on the fastening rings.

Note Do not exceed the maxim

page 279. Fig. 105 Variable luggage compartment floor storage compart- ment

Fig. 106 Variable luggage compartment floor storage compart- ment

AA

Seats and storage compartments144

rear),

gage compartment,

in the luggage compartment (only on vehicles

kit*.

on the rear roof handles.

s on the dash panel. These objects could be compartment when the vehicle is moving (e.g. r cornering) and distract the driver. Risk of

n fall from the centre console or other storage while the vehicle is moving. In the event of a ou will not be able to use the brake, clutch or

t hooks must not restrict the drivers view. oks are intended only for use with light arti- any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging dden braking manoeuvres or accidents, espe- deployment, these objects could injure the

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 144 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Luggage compartment net*

There is a retaining net in the luggage compartment for

securing objects.

Use the fastening rings located on the side of the luggage

compartment to attach the retaining net fig. 107.

Note Do not exceed the maximum authorised weight for the vehicle

page 279.

Other storage areas

Other storage areas can be found:

in the centre console,

in the door trims (front and

in the side trims of the lug

in the spare wheel recess

with an optional anti-puncture

The clothes hooks are located

WARNING

Do not store loose object flung through the passenger while accelerating, braking o accident.

Ensure that no objects ca areas into the driver footwell sudden braking manoeuvre, y accelerator. Risk of accident.

Clothing hung on the coa Risk of accident. The coat ho cles of clothing. Do not leave articles of clothing. During su cially those involving airbag vehicle occupants.

Fig. 107 Retaining net

Seats and storage compartments 145

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

rest*

Fig. 109 Opening the rear drink holders

Fig. 110 Rear armrest/drink holder

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 145 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Front drinks holders

In the centre console, in front of the gear lever, there are two drink holders

fig. 108.

WARNING

Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.

Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), these could cause injury in the case of an accident.

Rear drink holder*/ Arm

Fig. 108 Front drink holders

Seats and storage compartments146

partment

ction of the rear seat backrest, in order to

of the backrest.

ompartment mounting plate

ide of the vehicle, through the rear

ould be fitted between the backrest and

seat area.

lips the cushion frame. The rings of the

tment mounting plate appear at the front

the plate clip, tilt the rear backrest of the

slightly and then lean the backrest back-

g of the mobile storage compartment

e easier.

Fig. 112 Mobile storage compartment mounting plate

AH

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 146 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Opening and closing the armrest*/ drink holder*

To open, pull the loop in the direction of the arrow page 145,

fig. 109 .

To close, lift the Drink holder*/ armrest* in the direction of the

arrow page 145, fig. 110 .

WARNING

Ensure that the load in the luggage compartment is correctly secured with the retainer net when travelling with the armrest down page 144.

Multi-purpose mobile storage compartment* - Fitting and removal

This storage compartment may only be placed in the central

area of the rear seat

Fitting mobile storage com

Fold down the small se

access the large section

Fit the mobile storage c

fig. 112 from the ins

section of the seat. It sh

the seat, in the central

Push the plate until it c

mobile storage compar

of the seat.

If it is difficult to make

large section forwards

wards to make the fittin

onto the mounting plat

A1

A2

Fig. 111 Mobile storage compartment. Installation

Seats and storage compartments 147

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

torage compartment* - General

ent may only be placed in the central

Fig. 113 Mobile storage compartment. Opening

Fig. 114 Mobile storage compartment. Functions

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 147 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Place the mobile storage compartment onto the foam of the

central seat.

Set both mounting pieces together page 146, fig. 111,

with both mounting rings page 146, fig. 112 and press

hard until both the clips completely connect with the rings.

Removing mobile storage compartment

Pull each of the buttons page 146, fig. 111 on the clips

(red buttons) forwards, until they snap out of place.

Fold the larger seat down and remove the mobile storage

compartment mounting plate.

Multi-purpose mobile s information

This storage compartm

area of the rear seat

AE

AG

AF

Seats and storage compartments148

ng, keep the tables stored inside the mobile e cover closed, and likewise when they are

he cup holders. The drink may spill and cause ving.

up holders when the vehicle is in motion, may be flung around the vehicle and cause

ing plate is correctly clipped onto the cushion

se, store inside the storage compartment.

compartment is not in use, it should always net in the luggage compartment.

age compartment is correctly fitted, pulling it

mpartment and checking that both safety clips

rings.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 148 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Opening

Lift the cover at point page 147, fig. 113.

Closing

Push the cover down, until it clips into place.

Uses of the mobile storage compartment

The front open glove compartment may be used to store small objects

that will not damage passengers in the event that the objects are flung

around the interior of the vehicle.

The cup holders are used for holding drink cans or cups.

The elastic belt on the side may be used for keeping papers and maga-

zines.

The tables may be used as a support for writing.

To use the table page 147, fig. 114, it must be removed from its

compartment in the side of the mobile storage compartment and fitted into

slot page 147, fig. 114 on the front section of the mobile storage

compartment.

The table in the right-hand compartment is fitted in the left-hand slot of the

front of the mobile storage compartment and the table in the left-hand

compartment is fitted in the right-hand slot.

The tables have two positions for use and cannot be interchanged.

WARNING

The mobile storage compartment supports a maximum load of 5 kg. Do not overload.

Do not drive when the cover of the mobile storage compartment is open.

Do not drive when the tables are set up for use.

When the vehicle is movi storage compartment with th not in use

Never place hot drinks in t burns when the vehicle is mo

Do not leave cans in the c there is a danger that the can injury.

Make sure that the mount frame.

When the plate is not in u

When the mobile storage be fastened by the retaining

Note Check that the mobile stor

forwards by the front glove co

are correctly clipped onto the

AB AA

AC

AD

WARNING (continued)

Seats and storage compartments 149

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

lighter fig. 116 to activate it .

op out slightly.

ighter and light the cigarette on the

ette lighter can lead to serious injuries or start

ly. Carelessness or negligence when using the urns, risk of injury.

hen the ignition is turned on or the engine is fire, never leave children alone inside the

Fig. 116 The cigarette lighter is located in the power socket on the front of the centre console

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 149 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical sockets

Ashtray*

Opening and closing the ashtray

To open the ashtray, lift the cover fig. 115.

To close, push the cover down.

Emptying the ashtray

Extract the ashtray and empty it.

WARNING

Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the ashtray and cause a fire.

Cigarette lighter*

Press on the cigarette

Wait for the lighter to p

Pull out the cigarette l

glowing coil.

WARNING

Improper use of the cigar a fire.

Using the lighter careful cigarette lighter can cause b

The lighter only works w running. To avoid the risk of vehicle.

Fig. 115 Ashtray located in the front drink holder

Seats and storage compartments150

connected to the 12 volt socket in the front

in the luggage compartment* fig. 118. The

power point must not exceed a power rating of

nnected accessories will only operate when engine is running. Improper use of the ies can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. ver leave children alone inside the vehicle.

nces with the engine switched off will cause a

l accessories, see the instructions in

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 150 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Electrical sockets

Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt

sockets.

Electrical accessories may be

centre console fig. 117 and

appliances connected to each

120 Watt.

WARNING

The power sockets and the co the ignition is on or when the sockets or electrical accessor To avoid the risk of injury, ne

Note The use of electrical applia

battery discharge.

Before using any electrica

page 214. Fig. 117 Power socket in front centre console

Fig. 118 Power socket in luggage compartment

Seats and storage compartments 151

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

s an audio input (red and white connectors) or

ed, white and yellow connectors). For more

audio and video source, see the RSE manual.

Fig. 120 AUX RSE connection

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 151 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Auxiliary audio connection (AUX-IN)*

Lift the AUX cover fig. 119.

Insert the plug as far as possible (see Radio manual).

AUX RSE connection*

This connector may be used a

audio and video connector (r

details about the use of this

Fig. 119 Auxiliary audio connection

Seats and storage compartments152

he first aid kit do not belong to the standard

ly with legal requirements.

the contents of the first aid kit. After it has

a new one.

ies and emergency equipment see the instruc-

ed to the luggage compartment carpet with

not belong to the standard vehicle equipment.

comply with legal requirements.

isher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher

regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher

e for checking.

ies and emergency equipment see the instruc-

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 152 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

MEDIA-IN connector*

For information concerning the use of this equipment, please see the Radio

handbook.

First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher

Warning triangle* and first-aid kit*

The warning triangle and the first aid kit may be located in the storage

compartment in the luggage compartment floor, under the carpet.

The first aid kit may be located in the storage compartment under the carpet

in the luggage compartment floor, or in the storage compartment in the

luggage compartment side lining, depending on the version.

Note The warning triangle and t

vehicle equipment.

The first aid kit must comp

Observe the expiry date of

expired you should purchase

Before acquiring accessor

tions in page 214.

Fire extinguisher*

The fire extinguisher* is attach

Velcro.

Note The fire extinguisher does

The fire extinguisher must

Ensure that the fire extingu

should, therefore, be checked

will inform you of the next dat

Before acquiring accessor

tions in page 214.

Fig. 121 Connection in central armrest compart- ment

Seats and storage compartments 153

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ld chafe against the wires of the heating

nd cause damage.

f the rear side windows must not be covered as

eing extracted from the vehicle.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 153 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Luggage compartment

Storing objects

All luggage must be securely stowed.

Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles

well at all times:

Distribute the load as evenly as possible.

Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment

as possible.

Secure luggage in the luggage compartment with suitable straps

on the fastening rings*.

WARNING

Loose luggage and other loose items in the vehicle can cause serious injuries.

Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly move and change the way the vehicle handles.

During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects in the passenger compartment can be flung forward, injuring vehicle occupants.

Always store objects in the luggage compartment and secure with suit- able straps. This is especially important for heavy objects.

When you transport heavy objects, always take in account that a change in the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling.

Please observe information on safe driving page 7, Safe driving.

Caution Hard objects on the shelf cou

element in the rear window a

Note The ventilation slots in front o

this would prevent stale air b

Seats and storage compartments154

ull the shelf back until you hear a click

PRESS, and the cover is retrieved auto-

direction of the arrow, lift the cover and

he reverse order.

bjects on the rear shelf, because they will nts in case of sudden braking.

, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted.

partment could mean that the rear shelf is not

bent or damaged.

nt is overloaded, remove the tray.

items of clothing on the luggage compartment

ced.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 154 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Retractable rear shelf Using the rear shelf

Use the handle to p

fig. 122.

Press the area marked

matically.

To remove the rear shelf

Press the side pin in the

remove it. fig. 123

Installation is done in t

WARNING

Do not place heavy or hard o endanger the vehicle occupa

Caution Before closing the tailgate

An overloaded luggage com

correctly seated and it may be

If the luggage compartme

Note Ensure that, when placing

cover, rear visibility is not redu

Fig. 122 Using the rear shelf

Fig. 123 Removing the rear shelf

AA

Seats and storage compartments 155

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

rneath between the backrest and the

the slots in the roof, first the right then the

front anchor rings to tense the net

points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:

ggage racks and accessories approved by SEAT

ow the assembly instructions included with the

careful to position the front and rear luggage

he special housings on the longitudinal bars.

osition according to the direction of travel indi-

l. Not following these instructions may cause

rs.

. A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted for

t bar, the load must be distributed evenly along

e maximum load permitted for the entire roof

) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor should the

exceeded. See the Technical Data section.

or large objects on the roof, any change in the

e to a change in the centre of gravity or an

st be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-

must be used.

ith a sunroof*, ensure that it does not interfere

system when opened.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 155 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Partition net*

The net partition prevents loose objects in the luggage

compartment from being thrown forward into the passenger

compartment (e.g. under sudden braking).

Pull the net from unde

folding tray and fit it to

left fig. 124.

Hook the belts into the

fig. 125.

Roof rack*

Please observe the following

For safety reasons, only lu

should be used.

It is essential that you foll

bars exactly, being especially

compartment cover bars on t

You must also respect their p

cated in the assembly manua

marks on the longitudinal ba

Distribute the load evenly

each roof rack system suppor

the entire length. However, th

(including the support system

total weight of the vehicle be

When transporting heavy

normal vehicle behaviour du

increased wind resistance mu

able speed and driving style

For those vehicles fitted w

with the load on the roof rack

Fig. 124 Partition net

Fig. 125 Anchor rings for the separation net

Air conditioning156

is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is

e has reached its operating temperature.

ed off automatically approximately 20 minutes

also be switched off beforehand by pushing

vents strong odours in the outside air from

r example when passing through a tunnel or in

. 126 Heating controls on the dash panel

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 156 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Air conditioning

Heating

Operating instructions

Using the controls fig. 126 and and the control you

can set the temperature, air distribution and the blower speed.

To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button or

. When the function is activated, the display window in the

lower left of the button is lit.

Temperature

With the regulator the heating level is determined. The required tempera-

ture inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature.

Maximum heat output, which

only available when the engin

Heated rear window

This function will be switch

after being switched on. It can

the button

Air recirculation mode

Air recirculation mode pre

entering the vehicle interior, fo

queuing traffic .

Fig

A1 A4 A5

A2

A3

A1

A2

A3

Air conditioning 157

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 157 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

With low outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the vehicle rather than

the air from outside.

Air distribution

Control for setting the flow of air in the required direction.

Air distribution towards the windscreen. If the windscreen air output is

on and the air recirculation mode is pressed, this remains active. When the

recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution towards the windscreen mode

is selected, the recirculation mode is deactivated. For safety reasons, the air

recirculation mode should not be connected.

Air distribution to the upper body

Air distribution to footwell

Air distribution to the windscreen and the footwell

Blower

The air flow can be set at four speeds with the knob . The air flow should

always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.

WARNING

For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensa- tion. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.

In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. The windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).

Note Please observe the general notes page 166.

A4

A5

Air conditioning158

window The heating will be switched off auto-

0 minutes after switching on. It can also be

y pushing the button.

tion mode page 160

page 159

our speed settings for the air flow. The air flow

e lowest speed when driving slowly.

ust be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. od visibility. Please familiarise yourself with eating and ventilation system, including the

r the windscreens.

. 127 On the dash panel: Climatic controls

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 158 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Climatic*

Control switches

The climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works

when the engine is running and the blower is switched on.

Using the knobs fig. 127 and and knob you can set

the temperature, air distribution and blower speed.

To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button ,

or . When the function is activated, the display window in

the lower corner of the button is lit.

Temperature selector page 159

button Air conditioning system on/off page 159

button Heated rear

matically approximately 2

switched off beforehand b

Button Air recircula

Air distribution control Blower switch. There are f

should always be set at th

WARNING

For road safety all windows m This is essential to ensure go the correct operation of the h anti-fog/defrost functions fo

Fig

A1 A5 A6

A2

A3 A4

A1

A2 AC

A3

A4

A5

A6

Air conditioning 159

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

itioner using the button page 158,

elector anti-clockwise until the desired

ed.

to one of the settings 1-4.

g. 128 On the dash panel: Climatic controls

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 159 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Note Please observe the general notes page 166.

Heating and cooling the interior

Interior heating

Turn the temperature selector fig. 128 clockwise to select

the required temperature.

Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.

Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration

desired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest),

(towards the footwell) and (towards the windscreen and

footwell areas).

Interior cooling

Switch on the air cond

fig. 127 .

Turn the temperature s

cooling output is reach

Turn the blower switch

Fi

A1

AC

Air conditioning160

nts and prevents misting of the windows when

gh.

cannot be switched on this may be caused by

.

below +3 C.

compressor has been temporarily switched

t temperature is too high.

faulty.

. Have the air conditioner checked by a special-

.

. 129 On the dash panel: Climatic controls

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 160 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the

required direction: (to the windscreen), (to the upper

body), (to the footwell) and (to the windscreen and to the

footwell).

Heating

Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is

only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.

Air conditioner

When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,

but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves

comfort for the vehicle occupa

the ambient air humidity is hi

If the air conditioning system

the following reasons:

The engine is not running.

The blower is switched off

The outside temperature is

The air conditioning system

off because the engine coolan

The air conditioner fuse is

Another fault in the vehicle

ised workshop.

Air recirculation mode

Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from coming from the outside

Fig

Air conditioning 161

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 161 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Air recirculation mode page 160, fig. 129 prevents strong odours in

the outside air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing

through a tunnel or in queuing traffic.

With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the vehicle rather than

the cold air from outside.

With high outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the vehicle rather

than the ambient air.

If the windscreen air output is on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,

this remains active. When the recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution

towards the windscreen mode is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-

vated. For safety reasons, the air recirculation mode should not be

connected.

WARNING

In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).

Air conditioning162

ted separately for the left and right sides of the

tion for the windscreen. The air drawn in from

cted at the windscreen. The air recirculation

be switched off as soon as the defrost function

atures over 3 C, the air conditioning system

atically in order to dehumidify the air. The

the symbol appears on the radio or navigator

tribution

stribution

tribution

. 130 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 162 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

2C-Climatronic*

Control switches

The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioner settings for the left and right.

The air conditioner controls the temperature when the engine is

running and the blower is switched on.

Turn the temperature control knobs fig. 130 in order to adjust

the temperature on the left hand side or the right hand side

respectively.

The functions will be switched on when its buttons are pressed.

When these functions are activated, they are indicated on the

radio display. In addition, all these functions are lit with LEDs.

Press the button again to switch off the function.

The temperature can be adjus

vehicle interior.

Button defrost func

outside the vehicle is dire

mode, if switched on, will

is switched on. At temper

will be switched on autom

button is lit in yellow and

display.

button Upper air dis

button Centre air di

button Lower air dis

Fig

A1

A2

A3

A4

Air conditioning 163

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

formation

limatronic system can be displayed

d navigation screen mounted at

Fig. 131 Navigation display with information about the Climatronic

Fig. 132 Radio display with information about Climatronic

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 163 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

button Manual air recirculation mode

button Heated rear window The heating will be switched off auto-

matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. However, it may

be turned off by pushing the button. The button lights up yellow and the

symbol appears in the display.

button Automatic temperature, ventilation and air distribution

control page 164

button - Dual zone synchroniser

button Switches the 2C-Climatronic on and off page 165

Blower control page 165

button Switches on the air conditioning system

WARNING

For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.

Note Please observe the general notes page 166.

Viewing Climatronic in

Information about the C

on the radio or radio an

factory.

A5

A6

A7 AUTO

A8 DUAL

A9 OFF

A10

A11 AC

Air conditioning164

htly higher or lower depending on the ambient

ant temperature. The temperature of the air

ower speed and the air distribution are regu-

m also considers the sunlight radiation, so

djustment. Therefore, automatic mode almost

fort for the vehicle occupants throughout the

ff whenever an adjustment is made using the

, air flow or or the air recirculation button

inue to be regulated within the parameters

.

s:

alculates the air flow for two people.

alculates the air flow for more than two

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 164 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

The LEDs on the Climatronic controls indicate that the selected function has

been activated.

In addition, the radio or radio and navigation displays mounted at factory

briefly display the current settings of the Climatronic if any are modified.

The symbols used on the radio or radio and navigation displays are the same

as the symbols used for the Climatronic controls.

Automatic mode

In automatic mode air temperature, air flow and distribution

are automatically regulated so that a specified temperature is

attained as quickly as possible and then maintained.

The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right

sides of the vehicle interior.

Switching on automatic mode

Press page 162, fig. 130. AUTO High is shown on the

radio display (high fan speed).

Press again page 162, fig. 130. AUTO Low is shown

on the radio display (low fan speed).

Depending upon the version and finish, the vehicle may include:

When a temperature of 22 C (72 F) is set in automatic mode a comfortable

interior climate is quickly reached. Therefore, we recommend you not to

change this adjustment, except as necessary to suit individual preferences or

particular circumstances. The inside temperature can be set between +18 C

(64 F) and +26 C (80 F). These are approximate temperatures and the

actual temperature may be slig

conditions.

Climatronic maintains a const

supplied to the interior, the bl

lated automatically. The syste

there is no need for manual rea

always provides the best com

year.

Automatic mode is switched o

buttons for the air distribution

. The temperature will cont

manually selected by the user

Note There are two automatic mode

Automatic mode LO: This c

Automatic mode HI: This c

people.

AUTO

AUTO

Air conditioning 165

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

.

(80 F) is selected, the display switches to HI In

t maximum heating output and the temperature

freely using the control . Always have the

g to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into the

to the minimum -1, turns the Climatronic off.

d using the buttons , and . It is also

ome of the air vents separately.

g on and off

ED lit), the air conditioning system is on.

ED off), the air conditioning system is off.

g. 133 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls.

A10

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 165 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Manual mode

In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, air flow and distribution as required

Switching on manual mode

To enter manual mode, press one of the buttons fig. 133 to

or press the air flow control . The selected function is

shown on the radio or navigator display.

Temperature

There are separate temperature selectors for the left and right sides of the

vehicle interior. The selected temperature is displayed above the selector.

The inside temperature can be set between +18 C (64 F) and +26 C (80 F).

These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may be

slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions.

If a temperature below 18 C (64 F) is selected, the display switches to LO In

this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the temperature

is not regulated.

If a temperature above 26 C

this setting the system runs a

is not regulated.

Blower

The air flow may be adjusted

blower running at a low settin

vehicle. Pushing the button

Air distribution

The air distribution is adjuste

possible to open and close s

Switching the air conditionin

When the button is on (L

When the button is off (L

Fi

A1

A5 A10

AC

AC

Air conditioning166

es, the air recirculation increases the effective-

stem by cooling the air inside the vehicle rather

on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,

recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution

is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-

air recirculation mode should not be

cold air from the outside enters the vehicle g system is switched off, the windows can never leave the air recirculation mode risk of accident).

d particulate filter and active carbon filter)

purities in the outside air, including dust and

with maximum efficiency, the pollution filter

als specified in the Service Schedule.

maturely due to use in areas reaching very high

er must be changed more frequently than

.

tem is switched on, not only the temperature,

e vehicle interior is reduced. This improves

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 166 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

When the button is off, the air conditioning system is switched off to save

fuel. The temperature continues to self-regulate. The set temperature can

then only be reached if it is higher than the outside temperature.

Driver and passenger temperature control

The button controls the synchronisation of the 2 Climatronic climate

zones.

When the button is on (LED lit), the climate zone of the Climatronic is

personalised, for example: Driver side temperature 22 C and passenger side

temperature 23 C.

When the button is off (LED off), the climate zone of the Climatronic is

synchronised, for example: Driver side temperature 22 C and passenger side

temperature 22 C.

If the button is off and the passenger side temperature is changed, the

function is automatically activated.

Air recirculation mode

Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells

from coming from the outside.

Press the button page 165, fig. 133 to switch air recir-

culation mode on or off. It is switched on if the following symbol

appears in the display .

Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from

entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in

a traffic jam.

With low outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the vehicle rather than

the air from outside.

With high outside temperatur

ness of the air conditioning sy

than the ambient air.

If the windscreen air output is

this remains active. When the

towards the windscreen mode

vated. For safety reasons, the

connected.

WARNING

In air recirculation mode, no interior. If the air conditionin quickly mist over. Therefore, switched on for a long time (

General notes

Pollution filter

The pollution filter (a combine

serves as a barrier against im

pollen.

For the air conditioner to work

must be replaced at the interv

If the filter loses efficiency pre

pollution levels, the pollen filt

stated in the Service Schedule

Air conditioner

When the air conditioning sys

but also the air humidity in th

AC

DUAL

DUAL

DUAL

DUAL

A2

Air conditioning 167

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

s through the vehicle interior and is extracted

pose. Therefore, do not cover these slots with

ects.

tes most effectively with the windows and the

d. However, if the temperature inside the vehicle

n, the air inside can be cooled faster by opening

.

circulation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the

s a residue on the evaporator, producing a

.

the air conditioning at least once a month, to

and prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling

orised Service Centre should be consulted to

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 167 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when

the ambient air humidity is high.

If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by

the following reasons:

The engine is not running.

The button is disconnected.

The outside temperature is below +3 C.

The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched

off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.

The air conditioner fuse is faulty.

Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a special-

ised workshop.

Caution If you suspect that the air conditioner is damaged, switch it off with the

button to prevent further damage and have it checked by a specialised

workshop.

Repairs to the air conditioner require specialist knowledge and special

tools. Therefore, we recommend you to take the vehicle to a specialised work-

shop.

Note If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa- tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and so forming a puddle

underneath the vehicle. This is completely normal and there is no need to

suspect a leak.

Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and

leaves to ensure heating and cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the

windows from misting over.

The air from the vents flow

by slots designed for this pur

items of clothing or other obj

The air conditioner opera

sliding/tilting sunroof* close

is excessive because of the su

the windows for a short time

Do not smoke while air re

air conditioning system leave

permanent unpleasant odour

It is advisable to connect

lubricate the system gaskets

capacity is detected, an Auth

check the system.

AC

AC

Driving168

the correct position.

e steering column fig. 134 down

el until the correct position is set

again firmly .

ing column adjustment function and an incor- lt in serious injury.

eering column should be adjusted only when

Fig. 135 Proper sitting position for driver

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 168 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Driving

Steering

Adjusting the steering wheel position

The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely

adjusted to suit the driver.

Adjust the driver seat to

Push the lever under th

.

Adjust the steering whe

fig. 135.

Then push the lever up

WARNING

Incorrect use of the steer rect seating position can resu

To avoid accidents, the st the vehicle is stationary.

Fig. 134 Adjusting the steering wheel position

Driving 169

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

gramme (ESP)*

safer in certain situations.

amme (ESP) contains the electronic differential

ntrol system (TCS). The ESP function works

arning lamps will light up if the ESP or ABS

ally when the engine is started.

cannot be switched off. With the ESP switch it is

ff.

hen in cases where wheel sliding is desirable.

hains,

Fig. 136 Detailed view of the centre console: ESP button

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 169 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your chest page 168, fig. 135. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal injury.

If your physical constitution does not allow you to maintain the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The Authorised Service Centre will help you to decide if special specific modifi- cations are necessary.

If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 oclock and 3 oclock positions. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 oclock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

Safety

Electronic Stability Pro

ESP helps make driving

The Electronic Stability Progr

lock (EDL) and the traction co

together with the ABS. Both w

systems are faulty.

The ESP is started automatic

The ESP is always active, and

only possible to switch TCS o

The TCS can be deactivated w

For example:

When driving with snow c

WARNING (continued)

Driving170

key

lock

ignition and the engine are OFF and the

te without the ignition key, turn the steering

dible sound. You should always lock the

e your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle

glow plug system on

sition and release it. If the key cannot be turned

sition to position , move the steering

osens up.

Fig. 137 Ignition key positions

A0

A1

A0 A1

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 170 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,

when the vehicle is stuck, to rock it backwards and forwards.

Next, the button should be pressed to reactivate the TCS.

WARNING

The Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, as this can cause accidents.

Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP in page 187, Intelligent technology.

Ignition lock

Position of the ignition

Ignition switched off, steering

In this position fig. 137 the

steering may get locked.

For the Steering lock to opera

wheel until it locks with an au

steering wheel when you leav

theft .

Switching the ignition or the

Turn the ignition key to this po

or it is difficult to turn from po

wheel back and forth until it lo

Driving 171

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ted again automatically as soon as you pull the

d using a genuine SEAT key with its correct code.

icle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.

ping the engine

started using a genuine SEAT key with

the neutral position and depress the

y and hold it in this position for the starter

the starting page 170 position.

y as soon as the engine starts; the starter

with the engine.

e, you may need to slightly press down the

ine, it may be a little noisy for the first few

s built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.

ause for concern.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 171 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Starting

The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components

with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.

Every time the vehicle is started again, the ignition key must be turned to

position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents

possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.

WARNING

The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle comes to a standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be immediately blocked- Risk of accident!

Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short period. This is especially important if children or disabled people are left alone in the vehicle. They could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment such as the electric windows, conse- quently resulting in an accident.

Unsupervised use of the keys could start the engine or any electrical system, such as the electric window. This could result in serious injury.

Caution The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key

position ).

Electronic immobiliser

The immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons from driving

the vehicle.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-

matically when the key is inserted into the ignition.

The immobiliser will be activa

key out of the ignition lock.

The engine can only be starte

Note A perfect operation of the veh

Starting and stop

Starting petrol engines

The engine can only be

its correct code.

Move the gear lever to

clutch pedal thoroughl

to turn the engine on.

Turn the ignition key to

Let go of the ignition ke

motor must not run on

After starting a very hot engin

accelerator.

When starting a very cold eng

seconds until oil pressure ha

This is quite normal, and no c

A2

A0

A2

Driving172

tarted using a genuine SEAT key with

the neutral position and depress the

and hold it in this position for the starter

the starting position.

position page 170, fig. 137 . The

ight for engine pre-heating.

turns off, turn the key to position to

t press the accelerator.

y as soon as the engine starts, the starter

ed to run on with the engine.

ine, it may be a little noisy for the first few

built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.

ause for concern.

the engine, see the page 268.

el engine

ing of the battery, do not use any other major

glow plugs are pre-heating.

e glow plug warning lamp page 81 goes out.

uel tank has been completely run dry

letely run dry, it may take longer than normal

engine after refuelling with diesel fuel. This is

inate air first.

A1

A2

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 172 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

If the engine does not start immediately, switch the starter off after

10 seconds and try again after half a minute. If the engine still does not start,

the fuel pump fuse should be checked page 255, Fuses.

WARNING

Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.

Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.

Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at

full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.

The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start

the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you

should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow

the instructions in page 268, Jump-starting.

For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.

Start off immediately, driving gently. This helps the engine reach operating

temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Starting diesel engines

The engine can only be s

its correct code.

Move the gear lever to

clutch pedal thoroughly

to turn the engine on.

Turn the ignition key to

Turn the ignition key to

indicator lamp will l

When the warning lamp

start the engine. Do no

Let go of the ignition ke

motor must not be allow

When starting a very cold eng

seconds until oil pressure has

This is quite normal, and no c

If there are problems starting

Glow plug system for the dies

To avoid unnecessary discharg

electrical equipment while the

Start the engine as soon as th

Starting the engine after the f

If the fuel tank has been comp

(up to one minute) to start the

because the system must elim

Driving 173

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

f, the radiator fan may run on for up to 10

at the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant

the heat accumulated in the engine compart-

exposure to solar radiation.

off until the vehicle is completely stationary.

nly when the engine is running. With the trength is needed to brake. As normal brake

ed, risk of accidents and serious injury may

immediately blocked once the key is removed ng wheel cannot be turned. Risk of accident.

nning under a heavy load for a long period, heat

compartment and cause engine damage. For

he engine for approx. 2 minutes before you

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 173 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

WARNING

Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.

Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.

Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at

full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.

The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start

the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you

should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow

the instructions in page 268, Jump-starting.

For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.

You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine

reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Switching off the engine

Stop the vehicle.

Turn the ignition key to position page 170, fig. 137 .

After switching the engine of

minutes. It is also possible th

temperature increases due to

ment or due to its prolonged

WARNING

Never switch the engine

The brake servo works o engine switched off, more s operation cannot be perform exist.

The steering lock can be from the ignition. The steeri

Caution When the engine has been ru

can accumulate in the engine

this reason, you should idle t

switch it off.

A0

Driving174

tationary with the engine idling. Press the

.

o neutral and push the lever downwards.

he left, and then into the reverse position

r.

ngaged when the vehicle is stationary. When

ore engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds

thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.

n the reverse gear is selected and the ignition

ng, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a ch released.

ear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-

e gear lever while driving. The pressure of your

ear on the selector forks in the gearbox.

should always depress the clutch fully to avoid

e.

the clutch on hills. This causes premature wear

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 174 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Manual gearbox

Driving with a manual gearbox

Engaging the reverse gear

The vehicle should be s

clutch down thoroughly

Place the gear lever int

Slide the gear lever to t

shown on the gear leve

The reverse gear can only be e

the engine is running and bef

with the clutch pressed down

The reverse lights light up whe

is on.

WARNING

When the engine is runni gear is engaged and the clut

Never select the reverse g dent.

Note Do not rest your hand on th

hand could cause premature w

When changing gear, you

unnecessary wear and damag

Do not hold the vehicle on

and damage to the clutch.

Fig. 138 Detailed view of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 5-speed manual gearbox

Fig. 139 Detailed view of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual gearbox

Driving 175

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

/ DSG automatic gearbox has three

ogramme

ts a higher gear earlier rather than remain

nto position D to drive forwards

nto position R to reverse. This position is

es for reversing.

amme

tion S.

me, S, the programme is designed for a sports

hich changes up at higher engine speeds to use

Fig. 141 Programme selection

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 175 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox*

Selector lever positions

Selector lever positions indicated on the cover

P Parking position (lever locked).

R Reverse position.

N Neutral position (lever locked). This position is similar to the neutral

position for manual gearboxes).

D Drive position (economic driving programme).

S Sports driving position.

+/- Tiptronic driving position (this programme is similar to the operation of

a manual gearbox).

Driving programmes

The automatic gearbox

programmes.

Selecting the economy pr

This programme selec

in a lower gear.

Put the selector lever i

Put the selector lever i

shared by all programm

Selecting the sport progr

Move the lever to posi

If you select the sport program

mode, that is, a programme w

Fig. 140 Centre console: Selector lever for auto- matic gearbox / DSG auto- matic gearbox

Driving176

rake pedal, at the same time press the

ever.

n the vehicle is stopped or at a speed of less

, the lock is automatically released in position

(e.g. from R to D) the lever will not lock. If the

more than one second then it is locked. With

s prevented passing from P and N to any other

brake pedal.

in the position P in order to remove the key.

tic gearbox* / DSG automatic

ears are automatically engaged.

Fig. 143 Driving

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 176 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

the full power of the engine. This programme is not recommended for use on

the motorway or in the city.

Selecting the manual programme (tiptronic)

This programme allows driving similar to a manual gearbox.

This programme may be accessed using the selector lever or from the

steering wheel controls when this option is fitted page 178.

Selector lever locking

The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged

inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle to move.

Releasing the selector lever lock

Start the vehicle.

Press and release the b

button on the selector l

The lock is only activated whe

than 5 km/h. At higher speeds

N.

For rapid changes of position

lever remains in the position N the automatic lock, the lever i

gear without first pressing the

The selector lever must be put

Driving with an automa gearbox*

The drive and reverse g

Fig. 142 Deactivating the lock

Driving 177

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

cases, using the brake pedal to prevent

ehicle using another forward gear (engine

, release the brake and accelerate.

lower the gear must be for effective engine

ear is used on a very steep gradient, the engine

e vehicle accelerates. So that the engine speed

the gearbox changes to the next highest gear.

move the selector lever to the tiptronic gate to

eave the vehicle while the engine is running or any reason you must leave the vehicle with the andbrake and move the selector lever to posi-

ing and the positions D, S or R are selected, it icle with the brake pedal because the vehicle

hanging the position of the gear lever (risk of

r be moved into the positions R or P while .

p gradient, reduce speed and use the tiptronic r gear.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 177 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Driving

Press and hold the foot brake.

Press the button on the selector lever knob (on the left

page 176, fig. 143).

Select a gear for driving (R, D or S).

Release the button and wait a few seconds for the gear to

engage, a light jerk will be felt.

Release the brake and accelerate.

Short stop

Hold the vehicle stationary with the brake pressed down (for

example at traffic lights). The selector lever does not need to be

put into the positions P or N for this.

Do not press the accelerator.

Parking the vehicle

Press the brake pedal and hold to bring the vehicle to a stop.

Apply the handbrake firmly.

Press in the button on the selector lever knob, move the lever to

the position P and release the button.

Driving slowly

Move the selector lever to position D and press to the right to put

the lever into tiptronic mode.

Press the gear lever towards (-) to select a lower gear.

Hill stop

Hold the vehicle, in all

rolling back.

Do not try to slow the v

braking).

Descending gradients

With the gear engaged

The steeper the gradient the

braking. For example, if 3rd g

braking is insufficient and th

does not become excessive,

Depress the brake pedal and

return to 3rd gear.

WARNING

The driver should never l with any gear selected. If for engine running, apply the h tion P.

When the engine is runn is necessary to hold the veh will creep at a low speed.

Never accelerate while c an accident).

The gear lever must neve moving (risk of an accident)

Before descending a stee programme to select a lowe

Driving178

nic mode*

ws the driver to select gears manu-

Fig. 144 Changing gear with tiptronic

Fig. 145 Steering wheel with levers for automatic gearbox

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 178 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

If you must stop on a hill, always hold the vehicle using the footbrake to avoid rolling back.

The footbrake must not be held for a long period of time, not even lightly; continuous braking will cause overheating of the brakes and a reduction or even a loss of braking power and a significant increase in braking distances.

Never allow the vehicle to coast down a gradient with the selector lever in positions N or D, even when the engine is not running. For descents, the use of the tiptronic programme is recommended to keep the speed reduced.

Caution Never use the automatic gearbox to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill,

even for short periods, as this may overheat the gearbox and cause damage.

Apply the handbrake or depress the foot brake to hold the vehicle in position.

If the vehicle is allowed to roll with the engine stopped but the selector in

position N then the gearbox may be damaged because it will not be

lubricated.

Changing gear in tiptro

The tiptronic system allo

ally

WARNING (continued)

Driving 179

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

l or sport programme using the steering wheel

78, fig. 145 are used in the normal or sport

hes temporarily to tiptronic mode. To exit

e right paddle lever towards the steering

second. You will also leave tiptronic mode if the

for a certain time.

he steering wheel can operate with the selector

the vehicle in motion.

imum acceleration.

own thoroughly, the gearbox automatically

speed and engine speed, into a lower gear to

e vehicle maximum acceleration.

gear until the engine reaches the maximum

the gear.

vehicle if you accelerate on slippery road ury.

hen using the kickdown features on slippery celeration, the vehicle could lose traction and

own feature only when traffic and weather d safely.

+ OFF

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 179 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

General information about driving in tiptronic mode.

Changing gear with the selector lever

Put the lever in position D and press towards the right to enter

the tiptronic gate page 178, fig. 144.

Press the gear lever forwards page 178, fig. 144 to select

a higher gear.

Press the gear lever back page 178, fig. 144 to select a

lower gear.

Changing gear with the steering wheel levers

Press the right paddle lever (+OFF) towards the steering

wheel to change up page 178, fig. 145.

Press the left paddle towards the steering wheel to change

down page 178, fig. 145.

Using the paddle levers on the steering wheel, you can access manual driving

mode regardless of the pre-selected driving mode.

General information about driving in tiptronic mode

When accelerating, the automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox goes

into a higher gear a little before the engine reaches its maximum permitted

revolutions.

If a lower gear is selected, the automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox

will only change down when the engine cannot go over its maximum

permitted revolutions.

If tiptronic is selected whilst the vehicle is in motion and the automatic

gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox is in third gear and selector lever position

D, tiptronic mode will then also be in third gear.

Changing gears in the norma paddle levers

If the paddle levers page 1

programme, the system switc

tiptronic mode again, press th

wheel for approximately one

paddle levers are not moved

Note The gearbox controls on t

lever in any position and with

Kickdown feature

This feature allows max

If you press the accelerator d

changes down, depending on

take full advantage of give th

The gearbox does not change

determined engine speed for

WARNING

You could lose control of the surfaces. Risk of serious inj

Be particularly careful w road surfaces. With a fast ac skid.

You should use the kickd conditions allow it to be use

A+

A

A+

A

Driving180

s far as it will go in order to prevent you from

plied by mistake .

lights up when the handbrake is applied

The warning turns off when the handbrake is

with the handbrake on, the following

nstrument panel display: HANDBRAKE ON. You

ing signal.

to stop the vehicle when it is in motion. The bly longer, because braking is only applied to ent!

sed, this will cause rear brakes overheating, of the brake system and could lead to an acci- ture wear on the rear brake pads.

efore you leave the vehicle. The 1st gear should

lways be firmly applied when the

points when parking the vehicle:

stop the vehicle.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 180 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Handbrake

Using the handbrake

The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the

vehicle from accidentally rolling away.

Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when

you park.

Applying the handbrake

Pull the handbrake lever up firmly fig. 146.

Releasing the handbrake

Pull the lever up slightly and press the release knob in the direc-

tion of the arrow fig. 146 and guide the handbrake lever down

fully .

Always apply the handbrake a

driving with the handbrake ap

The handbrake warning lamp

and the ignition switched on.

released.

If you drive faster than 6 km/h

message* will appear on the i

will also hear an acoustic warn

WARNING

Never use the handbrake braking distance is considera the rear wheels. Risk of accid

If it is only partially relea which can impair the function dent. This also causes prema

Caution Always apply the handbrake b

also be selected.

Parking

The handbrake should a

vehicle is parked.

Always note the following

Use the brake pedal to

Fig. 146 Handbrake between the front seats

Driving 181

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

nditions, it may become extremely hot or cold be fatal.

luded in vehicles with ESP.

ng uphill.

conditions: doors closed, brake pedal pressed

The system is activated on selecting a gear.

the brake pedal, the braking force is maintained

he vehicle from moving backward when putting

time is enough to start the vehicle with ease.

reversing uphill.

hicle immediately after taking your foot off the y start to roll back under certain conditions.

se the hand brake immediately.

ess the brake pedal or use the hand brake

traffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehicle y when starting off, hold the brake pedal down rting off.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 181 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Apply the handbrake.

The 1st gear should also be selected.

Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition. Turn

the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.

Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle

.

Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:

Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle rolls against the kerb if it started

to roll.

If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they

point towards the kerb.

If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they

point away from the kerb.

Secure the vehicle as normal by applying the handbrake firmly and

engaging 1st gear.

WARNING

Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle unattended.

Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.

Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to occupants.

Never leave children alone in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in motion, for example, by releasing the handbrake or the gear lever.

Depending on weather co inside the vehicle. This can

Hill-start aid*

This function is only inc

This device helps when starti

These are the basic operation

down and vehicle in neutral.

After removing your foot from

for a few seconds to prevent t

into gear. This short space of

This system also works when

WARNING

If you do not start the ve brake pedal, the vehicle ma Depress the brake pedal or u

If the engine stalls, depr immediately.

When following a line of from rolling back accidentall for a few seconds before sta

WARNING (continued)

Driving182

a towing bar, the parking aid system will not

nt of the reverse gear when pulling a trailer, as

will be plugged into the vehicle.

or some seconds when the reverse gear is

ere is a fault in the parking aid system.

ignition is turned off, the acoustic signal

emitted every time the system is reactivated

). Thus, the system ready indication will not

paired by an Authorised Service Centre as soon

acoustic warning signal, then the parking aid

not warn of obstacles.

s properly, the sensors must be kept clean and

ots in which obstacles may not be detected.

children and animals because the system will ys pay attention when reversing to avoid acci-

placement for driver awareness. The driver for parking and other manoeuvres.

cles detected by the system may no longer be

e car moves closer, so the system will not give

inds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,

, high kerbs or painted railings etc) may not

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 182 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Note Your Authorised Service or a specialised workshop can tell you if your vehicle

is equipped with this system.

Parking aid acoustic system*

Rear parking aid

The parking aid system will use an acoustic signal to warn of

the approach of any object towards the rear of the vehicle.

Description

The acoustic parking aid system will measure the distance between the rear

of the vehicle and any possible obstacle using four ultrasonic sensors located

on the rear bumper. The measuring range of the sensors starts approximately and depending on the nature of the obstacle at a distance of:

side of the rear bumper: 0.8 m

middle of the rear bumper: 1.5 m

Activation

The system is activated by engagement of the reverse gear. A brief acoustic

signal confirms the activation and correct function of the system.

Reverse gear

The distance warning will begin as soon as an obstacle is detected by the

system. The frequency of the bleeps emitted by the system will increase

rapidly as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.

Within a short distance of about 25 cm, a continuous signal sounds (stop

signal). The driver should not reverse any further.

Trailer towing

For vehicles factory-fitted with

be activated by the engageme

the trailers electric connector

Possible faults

If a continuous beep sounds f

engaged, this indicates that th

If the fault continues until the

warning of the fault will not be

(by engaging the reverse gear

sound either. Have the fault re

as possible.

If there is no ready signal or no

loudspeaker is faulty and may

To ensure that the system work

free of ice and snow.

WARNING

The sensors have blind sp

Always look out for small not always detect them. Alwa dents.

The parking aid is not a re must take full responsibility

Caution Please note that low obsta

registered by the sensors as th

any further warning. Certain k

thin posts or trailer draw bars

Driving 183

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

the cruise control system if it is not possible

ntrol system when driving in dense traffic, on n roads with poor conditions (with ice, slippery l), as this could cause an accident.

control system off after using it in order to

et speed which is too high for the current road, . Risk of accident.

ntain a constant speed when descending down-

e due to its own weight. Use the foot brake to

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 183 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

always be detected by the system, so there is a risk of damaging the vehicle

in such cases.

In some cases, obstacles with uniform edges and bumps may not be

detected immediately by the system due to their geometry. Take special care

of this type of obstacle (corners, rectangular objects, etc.), as they can cause

damage to the vehicle.

Be especially careful when manoeuvring into a corner between two

perpendicular walls. Carefully watch the approach of the wall to the side of

the vehicle (using the mirrors).

The parking aid system does not replace use of the mirrors for manoeu-

vres.

External ultra-sonic sources (pneumatic drills, construction machinery,

other vehicles with PDC) may interfere with the operation of the system.

Periodic cleaning of the sensors, take care not to damage or scratch them.

When cleaning with high pressure washers or steam cleaners, the sensors

should be sprayed for only a very short period and from a distance of more

than 10 cm.

Cruise control*

Description

The cruise control system is able to maintain the set speed in

the range of 30 km/h to 180 km/h.

Once the speed setting has been saved, you may take your foot off the accel-

erator.

WARNING

It could be dangerous to use to drive at constant speed.

Do not use the cruise co roads with lots of bends or o surfaces, loose grit or grave

Always switch the cruise avoid an involuntary use.

It is dangerous to use a s traffic or weather conditions

Note The cruise control cannot mai

hill. The vehicle will accelerat

slow the vehicle.

Driving184

T/- of the rocker switch fig. 148

ave reached the speed you wish to set.

witch, the current speed is set and held

Fig. 148 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

AA

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 184 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Switching the cruise control system on and off

Switching on the system

Push the switch fig. 147 to the left to ON.

Switching off the system

Either push the switch to the right to OFF or turn the ignition

off when the vehicle is stationary.

When the cruise control is on and a speed is programmed, the indicator on

the instrument panel is lit.21)

If the cruise control system is switched off, the symbol is switched off. The

system will also be fully switched off when the 1st gear is selected.*

Setting speed*

Press the lower part SE once briefly when you h

When you release the rocker s

constant.

21) Depending on the model version.

Fig. 147 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

AB

AB

Driving 185

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

h the accelerator and then release the pedal, the

tore the set speed. This will not be the case,

is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored

tes. The speed will have to be stored again.

if you reduce speed by depressing the brake

control by pressing once on the upper part of the

185, fig. 149 .

speed which is too high for the current road, . Risk of accident.

m temporarily*

l be switched off in the following situations:

essed,

AA

Fig. 150 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 185 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Adjusting set speed*

The speed can be altered without touching the accelerator or

the brake.

Setting a higher speed

Press the upper part RES/+ of the rocker switch fig. 149 to

increase the speed. The vehicle will continue to accelerate as

long as you keep the rocker switch pressed. When you release

the switch, the new speed is stored.

Setting a lower speed

Press the lower part SET/ of the rocker switch to reduce the

speed. The vehicle will automatically reduce its speed for as long

as you keep the switch pressed. When you release the switch, the

new speed is stored.

When you increase speed wit

system will automatically res

however, if the vehicle speed

speed for longer than 5 minu

Cruise control is switched off

pedal. You can reactivate the

rocker switch RES/+ page

WARNING

It is dangerous to use a set traffic or weather conditions

Switching off the syste

The cruise control system wil

if the brake pedal is depr

Fig. 149 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

AA

AA

Driving186

ox

ed off by moving the control all the way to

ed), or when the vehicle is stationary, ignition

ox / DSG automatic gearbox*

ystem, the selector lever must be placed in one

, R or 1 or with the vehicle stopped and the

AB

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 186 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

if the clutch pedal is depressed,

if the vehicle is accelerated to over 180 km/h,

when the lever is moved to the position CANCEL without reaching

the OFF position. Once the CANCEL operation is completed, the lever is

released and returns to its initial position.

To resume the cruise control, release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the

vehicle speed to less than 180 km/h and press once on the upper part of the

rocker switch RES/+ fig. 150 .

WARNING

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.

Turning off the cruise control system*

Vehicles with a manual gearb

The system is completely turn the right hand side (OFF engag

off.

Vehicles with automatic gearb

To completely disengage the s

of the following positions: P, N ignition turned off.

AB

AA

Fig. 151 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

Intelligent technology 187

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

(HBA)*

sist function (HBA) is only included in

s brake in time, but not with maximum force.

long braking distances.

system comes into action. When pressing the

tant interprets it as an emergency. It then very

ke pressure so that the ABS can be activated

thus reducing the braking distance.

n the brake pedal. The brake assist system

soon as you release the brake.

nly and continuously at a speed of more than 80

several times per second to warn vehicles

e braking, the hazard warning lights will come

hicle comes to a standstill. They switch off auto-

arts to move again.

gher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep in front, and when the road surface is slippery nt risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 187 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Practical Tips

Intelligent technology

Brakes

Brake servo

The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works

only when the engine is running.

If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle has

to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to

make up for the lack of servo assistance.

WARNING

The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.

Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.

If the brake servo is not working, for example when the vehicle is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal.

Hydraulic Brake Assist

The Hydraulic Brake As

vehicles with ESP.

In an emergency, most driver

This results in unnecessarily

This is when the brake assist

brake pedal rapidly, the assis

quickly builds up the full bra

more quickly and efficiently,

Do not reduce the pressure o

switches off automatically as

Emergency braking warning

If the vehicle is braked sudde

km/h, the brake light flashes

driving behind. If you continu

on automatically when the ve

matically when the vehicle st

WARNING

The risk of accident is hi your distance to the vehicle or wet. The increased accide system.

Intelligent technology188

rily guarantee shorter braking distances in all

ce could even be longer if you brake on gravel

ippery surface.

m cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is

d wheels under braking), you should reduce e road and traffic conditions. Do not let the ou into taking any risks when driving.

is also determined by the tyres fitted

es are modified, the effectiveness of the ABS

(TCS)

em prevents the drive wheels from

cle is accelerating.

he traction control system during acceleration

help prevent the drive wheels of front-wheel

uring acceleration. The system works in the

tion with ABS. If a malfunction occurs in the

erative.

oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-

y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.

tically when the engine is started. If necessary,

hing the button on the centre console.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 188 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

The brake assist system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are dangerous even with the brake assist system! Therefore, it is essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.

Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS (ABS and TCS)

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking

during braking.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicles active

safety system.

How the ABS works

If one of the wheels is turns too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is

close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel.

The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or

more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has inter-

vened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed

so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not pump.

If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is

retained as the wheels do not lock.

However, ABS will not necessa

conditions. The braking distan

or on fresh snow covering a sl

WARNING

The anti-lock brake syste and wet roads are dangerous working (to counteract locke speed immediately to suit th extra safety features tempt y

The effectiveness of ABS page 236.

If the running gear or brak could be severely limited.

Traction control system

The traction control syst

spinning when the vehi

Description and operation of t (TCS)

TCS reduces engine power to

drive vehicles losing traction d

entire speed range in conjunc

ABS, the TCS will also be inop

TCS helps the vehicle to start m

pery conditions where this ma

The TCS is switched on automa

it may be turned on or off pus

WARNING (continued)

Intelligent technology 189

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

eshaft differential mechanism allows the outer

ed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel

heel) receives less drive torque than the inner

certain situations the torque delivered to the

ing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the

er drive torque than it could transmit. This

ral grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer

tory.

signals, the XDS system is able to detect and

kes the inner wheel, thereby counteracting the

eel. This means that the drivers desired trajec-

ombination with the ESP and is always active,

ol, TCS, is disconnected.

ty Programme (ESP)*

Programme increases the vehicles

amme helps reduce the danger of skidding.

amme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL, TCS and endations.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 189 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

When the TCS is off, the warning lamp is lit. The TCS should normally

be left on. Only in exceptional circumstances, when the slipping of the wheels

is required, should it be disconnected, for example

With compact temporary spare wheel.

When using the snow chains.

When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces

When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by rocking.

The TCS should be switched on again as soon as possible.

WARNING

It must be remembered that TCS cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by TCS tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Caution In order to ensure that TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be

fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can

cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.

Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running

gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-

ciency of the ABS and TCS.

XDS*

Driveshaft differential

When taking a bend, the driv

wheel to turn at a higher spe

that is turning faster (outer w

wheel. This may mean that in

inner wheel is too high, caus

outer wheel is receiving a low

causes an overall loss of late

or lengthening of the trajec

By using the ESP sensors and

correct this effect.

Through the ESP, the XDS bra

excess drive torque in this wh

tory is much more precise,

The XDS system operates in c

even when the traction contr

Electronic Stabili

General notes

The Electronic Stability

stability on the road.

The Electronic Stability Progr

The Electronic Stability Progr

Steering manoeuvre recomm

OFF

Intelligent technology190

functions correctly, all four wheels must be

differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can

gine power when this is not desired.

e (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running

ting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-

d TCS.

(ABS)

vents the wheels locking during braking

ck (EDL)*

al lock helps prevent the loss of trac-

driven wheels starts spinning.

oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-

y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.

olutions of the drive wheels using the ABS

lt the warning lamp for ABS lights up)

ely 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ-

n wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by

side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the

nd distributing more driving force to the other

al.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 190 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)*

ESP reduces the danger of skidding by braking the wheels individually.

The system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the

changes of direction desired by the driver, and constantly compares them

with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. If the desired course is not being

maintained (for instance, if the vehicle is starting to skid), then the ESP

compensates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel.

The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable

condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer, the system will act on the front

wheel on the outside of the turn.

Steering manoeuvre recommendations

This is a complementary safety function included in the ESP This function aids

the driver to better stabilize the vehicle in a critical situation. For example, in

case of sudden braking surface with varied adherence, the vehicle will tend

to destabilise its trajectory to the right or to the left. In this case the ESP

recognizes the situation and helps the driver with a counter steering

manoeuvre from the power steering.

This function simply provides the driver with a recommended manoeuvre in

critical situations.

The vehicle does not steer itself with this function, the driver has full control

of the vehicle at all times.

WARNING

It must be remembered that ESP cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, as this can cause accidents.

Caution In order to ensure that ESP

fitted with the same tyres. Any

cause the system to reduce en

Modifications to the vehicl

gear or any components affec

ciency of the ABS, EDL, ESP an

Anti-lock brake system

The anti-lock brake system pre

page 188.

Electronic differential lo

The electronic differenti

tion caused if one of the

EDL helps the vehicle to start m

pery conditions where this ma

The system will control the rev

sensors (in case of an EDL fau

page 82.

At speeds of up to approximat

ences in the speed of the drive

a slippery road surface on one

wheel which has lost traction a

driven wheel via the differenti

Intelligent technology 191

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

els, the engine power is distributed to

erates completely automatically. The propul-

ng the four wheels and adapted to the driving

.

ly designed to complement the superior engine

s the vehicle exceptional handling and perform-

rmal roads and in more difficult conditions, such

your vehicle will have plenty of traction in winter

ndard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend

tyres should be fitted on all four wheels when

pected, mainly because this will give a better

are mandatory, this also applies to cars with all-

ive, all four tyres must have the same rolling

, you should always adjust your speed to suit e extra safety features tempt you into taking re to do so could result in an accident.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 191 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

To prevent the disc brake of the braking wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts

out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to

function normally without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not informed that

the EDL has been switched off.

The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.

WARNING

When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow, press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to spin. This could impair the vehicles stability.

Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Caution Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running

gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-

ciency of the EDL page 214.

The traction control system (TCS)

The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the

vehicle is accelerating page 188.

All-wheel drive*

On all-wheel drive mod

all four wheels

General notes

The all-wheel drive system op

sion force is distributed amo

style and the road conditions

The all-wheel drive is special

power. This combination give

ance capabilities, both on no

as snow and ice.

Winter tyres

Thanks to its all-wheel drive,

conditions, even with the sta

that winter tyres or all-season

winter road conditions are ex

braking response.

Snow chains

On roads where snow chains

wheel drive.

Changing tyres

On vehicles with all-wheel dr

circumference page 241.

WARNING

Even with all-wheel drive the conditions. Do not let th any risks when driving. Failu

Intelligent technology192

/h and the windscreen wipers are on, the brake

ds the brake discs for a few seconds. This

wing - at regular intervals and allows a faster

n driving on wet roads.

in heavy rain, or after washing the vehicle or

braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or

nd brake pads. In this case the brakes should

pedal several times.

s can also be temporarily reduced if the vehicle

hout using the brakes when there is a lot of salt

se, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads

.

orrosion to form on the discs and dirt to build

hicle is used infrequently or the brakes are not

uently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is

s and disks by braking firmly a few times at a

.

d ever increase suddenly, this may mean that

as failed. Drive immediately to the nearest

e the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and

o apply more pressure on the brake pedal and

nces.

brake system if the brake fluid level is too low.

red electronically.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 192 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

The braking capability of your vehicle is limited by the tyres grip. Vehicle behaviour is no different from a vehicle without four-wheel drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast on icy or slippery roads just because the vehicle still has good acceleration in these conditions. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

On wet roads bear in mind that the front wheels may start to aquaplane and lose contact with the road if the vehicle is driven too fast. If this should happen, there will be no sudden increase in engine speed when aqua- planing begins to warn the driver, as with a front-wheel drive vehicle. For this reason and for that mentioned above, always choose a driving speed suitable for the road conditions. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Brakes

What factors can have a negative effect on the brakes?

New brake pads

New brake pads do not provide optimal performance during the first 400 km;

first they must be run in. However, the reduced braking capacity may be

compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid over-

loading the brakes during run-in.

Wear

The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and

the conditions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for

instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts

and stops.

Wet roads or road salt

When the speed is over 80 km

system moves the pads towar

occurs - without the driver kno

response from the brakes whe

In certain conditions, such as

driving through water, the full

in winter by ice) on the discs a

be dried by pressing the brake

The effectiveness of the brake

is driven for some distance wit

on the road in winter. In this ca

has to wear off before braking

Corrosion

There may be a tendency for c

up on the brake pads if the ve

used very often.

If the brakes are not used freq

advisable to clean off the pad

moderately high speed

Faults in the brake system

If the brake pedal travel shoul

one of the two brake circuits h

specialised workshop and hav

remember that you will have t

allow for longer stopping dista

Low brake fluid level

Malfunctions can occur in the

The brake fluid level is monito

WARNING (continued)

Intelligent technology 193

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ronic*)

t easier to turn the steering wheel

ning.

iver by reducing the force needed to turn the

ed with servotronic* power steering the degree

ted electronically according to road speed.

on working even if the servotronic* device fails.

ce will, however, no longer adapt to different

lating system is not working properly, this is

the steering wheel at low speeds (for instance

will be required than usual. The fault should be

rkshop as soon as possible.

if the engine is off. In this case the steering

rce to turn.

rning limit when the vehicle is stationary, this

n the power steering system. Turning the

ces a load on the system, which causes noise. It

eed of the engine.

do not turn the steering wheel to its limit for

wise, there is a risk of damaging the power

e turned even if the power steering fails or the

tance when being towed). However, more effort

eering wheel.

malfunctioning, please take the vehicle to a

n as possible.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 193 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Brake servo

The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The

brake servo works only when the engine is running.

WARNING

When applying the brakes to clean off deposits on the pads and discs, select a clear, dry road. Be sure not to inconvenience or endanger other road users. Risk of accident.

Ensure the vehicle does not move while in neutral, when the engine is stopped. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Caution Never let the brakes drag by leaving your foot on the pedal when it is

not necessary to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-

ping distances and greater wear.

Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed

and change to a lower gear (or move the gear lever to a lower gear position if

your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking

and prolongs the service life of the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes,

it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously.

Note If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle

has to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder

to make up for the lack of servo assistance.

If you wish to equip the vehicle with accessories such as a front spoiler or

wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not

obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.

Power steering (servot

Power steering makes i

when the engine is run

Power steering assists the dr

steering wheel. In cars equipp

of power assistance is regula

The power steering will keep

The degree of power assistan

speeds. If the electronic regu

most noticeable when turning

when parking), as more effort

corrected by a specialised wo

Power steering does not work

wheel requires much more fo

If the steering is held at its tu

will place an excessive load o

steering wheel to its limit pla

will also reduce the idling sp

Caution When the engine is running,

more than 15 seconds. Other

steering.

Note The steering wheel can b

engine is switched off (for ins

will be required to turn the st

If the system is leaking or

specialised workshop as soo

Intelligent technology194

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 194 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

The power steering system requires a special hydraulic fluid. The

container is located in the engine compartment (front left). The correct fluid

level in the reservoir is important for the power steering to function properly.

The hydraulic fluid level is checked at the Inspection Service.

Driving and the environment 195

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

raking distance

d braking distance are influenced by

oad conditions.

epends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate

ends to a great extent on the conditions under

and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often

rt distances or have a sporty driving style, we

e thickness of your brake pads checked by an

re frequently than recommended in the Service

for example, after crossing areas of water, in

ashing the vehicle, the effect of the brakes is

re wet or even frozen (in winter). In this case the

essing the brake pedal several times.

d faults in the brake system increase the risk

run in and do not have the correct friction ever, the reduced braking capacity may be the brake pedal a little harder. This also

s have to be changed further on.

n, or if you are driving on roads which have may be lower than normal.

s are excessively used, they will overheat. teep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 195 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Driving and the environment

Running-in

Running in a new engine

The engine needs to be run in over the first 1500 km.

Up to 1000 kilometres

Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the maximum speed.

Do not accelerate hard.

Avoid high engine revolutions.

Do not tow a trailer.

From 1000 to 1500 kilometres

Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed

or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).

During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is

greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.

For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consumption

reduced.

Braking capacity and b

The braking capacity an

driving situations and r

The efficiency of the brakes d

of wear of the brake pads dep

which the vehicle is operated

drive in town traffic, drive sho

recommend that you have th

Authorised Service Centre mo

Plan.

If you drive with wet brakes,

heavy rainfall or even after w

lessened as the brake discs a

brakes should be dried by pr

WARNING

Longer braking distances an of accidents.

New brake pads must be during the first 400 km. How compensated by pressing on applies when the brake pad

If brakes are wet or froze been salted, braking power

On steep slopes, if brake Before driving down a long s

Driving and the environment196

do not replenish with too much engine oil

up engine oil .

start it, use jump leads if necessary

running or loss of power when the vehicle is

iately and have the vehicle inspected at the

. In general, the exhaust gas warning lamp will

ribed symptoms occur page 76. If this

er the exhaust system and escape into the envi-

ter can also be damaged by overheating.

es very high temperatures! There is a risk of

alytic converter could come into contact with rials under the vehicle.

nderseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the erter or the heat shields on the exhaust

ld catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.

etely dry because the irregularity of the fuel

blems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the

ause overheating and damage the catalytic

vironment ol system is working perfectly, there may be a

ust gas under some conditions. This depends

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 196 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

change down into a lower gear or range (depending on the type of trans- mission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.

Never let the brakes drag by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.

Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.

If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can form in the brake system. This reduces the efficiency of the brakes.

Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Before purchasing accessories please observe the relevant instructions page 214, Technical modifications.

If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider- ably. Contact a specialised workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary journeys.

Exhaust gas purification system

Catalytic converter*

To maintain the useful life of the catalytic converter

Use only unleaded petrol with petrol engines, as lead damages

the catalytic converter.

Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.

For engine oil changes,

page 224, Topping

Never tow the vehicle to

page 268.

If you notice misfiring, uneven

moving, reduce speed immed

nearest specialised workshop

light up when any of the desc

happens, unburnt fuel can ent

ronment. The catalytic conver

WARNING

The catalytic converter reach fire.

Never park where the cat dry grass or flammable mate

Do not apply additional u exhaust pipes, catalytic conv system. These materials cou

Caution Never run the fuel tank compl

supply may cause ignition pro

exhaust system, which could c

converter.

For the sake of the en Even when the emission contr

smell of sulphur from the exha

WARNING (continued)

Driving and the environment 197

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

matically and that you must carry out a cleaning

81.

ulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- parked so that the exhaust pipe does not come materials underneath the vehicle. Otherwise

ed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any diesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage

m. The addition of biodiesel to diesel by the

e with standard EN 590 is authorised and will

ine or the fuel system.

gh sulphur content may significantly reduce the

iculate filter. Your Authorised Service Centre will

tries have diesel with a high sulphur content.

nvironmentally friendly

nmentally friendly driving

ntal pollution and wear to the engine, brakes

our driving style. By adopting an economical

the traffic situation ahead, you can easily

0-15%. Some tips on how to help you reduce

are listed below.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 197 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

on the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be

solved by changing to another brand of fuel.

Diesel engine particulate filter*

The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced

by burning diesel.

Your vehicle is fitted with a DPF (Diesel particulate filter) if the vehicle data

sticker (back cover of the Maintenance Programme) lists the PR code 7GG

or 7MG fig. 152.

The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the

exhaust gas system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself.

If the driving conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example,

multiple short trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the

indicator for the diesel engine particulate filter indicator will light up. This

does not represent a fault, it is a warning that indicates that the filter has not

been able to regenerate auto

cycle, as indicated in page

WARNING

The diesel engine partic tures; the vehicle should be into contact with flammable there is a risk of fire.

Caution Your vehicle is not design

circumstances refuel with bio

the engine and the fuel syste

diesel producer in accordanc

not cause damage to the eng

Using diesel fuel with a hi

working life of the diesel part

be able to tell you which coun

Economical and e driving

Economical and enviro

Fuel consumption, environme

and tyres depend mostly on y

driving style and anticipating

reduce fuel consumption by 1

pollution while saving money

Fig. 152 Vehicle data sticker on back cover of the Maintenance Programme

Driving and the environment198

arantees that, before beginning a journey, you

e required amount of fuel. A well-serviced

f improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum

sale value.

onsume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.

d emission of polluting gases, the engine and

should reach the optimum service tempera-

sumption is proportionally higher. The engine

nsumption does not normalise until having

metres. This is why we recommend avoiding

.

sures

tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the

o low, fuel consumption can increase by as

er rolling resistance, under-inflation also

irs handling.

ays be checked when the tyres are cold.

r round as they increase fuel consumption by

put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth

tment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-

orted.

e for the sake of convenience, even when it is

of 100-120km/h your vehicle will use about

e extra wind resistance caused by the roof rack

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 198 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Drive anticipating the traffic situation

A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-

tion, you have to brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible,

let the vehicle roll with a gear engaged, for example, if you see a red light

ahead. The braking effect achieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of

brakes and tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are reduced to zero

(disconnection due to inertia).

Change gear early to save energy

An effective way of saving fuel is to change up quickly through the gears.

Running the engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary

amount of fuel.

Manual gearbox: Change from first to second gear as quickly as possible. We

recommend that, whenever possible, you change to a higher gear upon

reaching 2000 rpm. Follow the recommended gear indication that appears on

the instrument panel page 61.

Avoid driving at high speed

We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel

consumption, exhaust emissions and noise levels all increase very rapidly at

higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Avoid idling

It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level

crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after only

30 - 40seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart the

engine.

The engine takes a long time to warm up when it is idling. Mechanical wear

and pollutant emissions are also especially high during this initial warm-up

phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the engine.

Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Periodic maintenance

Periodic maintenance work gu

will not consume more than th

engine gives you the benefit o

reliability and an enhanced re

A badly serviced engine can c

Avoid short journeys

To reduce the consumption an

the exhaust filtration systems

ture.

With the engine cold, fuel con

does not warm up and fuel co

driven approximately four kilo

short trips whenever possible

Maintain the correct tyre pres

Bear in mind that keeping the

tyre pressure is just one bar to

much as 5%. Due to the great

increases tyre wear and impa

The tyre pressures should alw

Do not use winter tyres all yea

up to 10%.

Avoid unnecessary weight

Every kilo of extra weight will

checking the luggage compar

essary loads are being transp

A roof rack is often left in plac

no longer needed. At a speed

12% more fuel as a result of th

even when it is not in use.

Driving and the environment 199

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ers are rated in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO

can be recycled

rouped together for easy recycling

n manufacture

pounds in plastics

conditioner

aterials regulation: cadmium, lead, mercury,

or manufacturing plastic parts

g

cting the vehicles in transit

on

tensively for energy conversion and building

n reduced

paints

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 199 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Save electricity

The engine activates the alternator, which produces electricity. With the need

for electricity, fuel consumption is also increased. Because of this, always

turn off electrical components when you do not need them. Examples of

components that use a lot of electricity are: the fan at high speeds, the rear

window heating or the seat heaters*.

Note If you vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not recommended to disconnect this

function.

It is recommended to close the windows when driving at more than 60

km/h

Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, as the pressure can

make the plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can burn the clutch plate

lining, causing a serious fault.

Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch, use the foot brake or hand

brake, using the latter to start. The fuel consumption will be lower and you will

prevent the clutch plate from being damaged.

On descents, use the engine brake, changing to the gear that is more suit-

able for the slope. The fuel consumption will be lower and the brakes will not

suffer.

Environmental friendliness

Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials

and production of your new Seat.

Design measures for economical recycling

Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling

Modular construction to facilitate dismantling

Increased use of single-grade materials

Plastic parts and elastom

11469 and ISO 1629

Choice of materials

Nearly all materials used

Similar types of plastics g

Recycled materials used i

Reduction of volatile com

CFC-free refrigerant in air

Compliance with prohibited m chrome VI.

Manufacturing methods

Use of recycled material f

Solvent-free cavity sealin

Solvent-free wax for prote

Solvent-free adhesives

No CFCs used in producti

Surplus materials used ex

materials

Overall water consumptio

Heat recovery systems

The use of water-soluble

Driving and the environment200

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 200 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Driving abroad

Observations

To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:

For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is

available for the journey. See the chapter Refuelling. Automobile organisa-

tions will have information about service station networks selling unleaded

fuel.

In some countries, it is possible that your vehicle model is not sold, and

therefore spare parts are not available or the Authorised Services can only

carry out limited repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the

technical preparations that you vehicle requires and also about necessary

maintenance and repair possibilities.

Adhesive strips for headlights

If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or

vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming

traffic.

To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight

lenses. Further information is available at your Authorised Service Centre.

In vehicles with adaptive headlights, the rotation system must previously be

disconnected. To do this, please go to a specialised workshop.

Trailer towing 201

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

s and drawbar loads that are given on the data

re for certification purposes only. The correct

l, which may be lower than these figures for the

he vehicle documents or in Section Tech-

so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as

trailer must be secured to prevent them

um permissible pressure shown on the sticker

flap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in

anufacturers recommendations.

nough of the road behind the trailer with the

t the case, you should have additional mirrors

hould be mounted on hinged extension

o give sufficient vision to the rear.

trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.

ditional demands on the vehicle. We recom-

ween the normal inspection intervals if the

towing a trailer.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 201 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Trailer towing

Instructions to follow

Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip-

ment.

If the vehicle is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already

have the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory require-

ments for towing a trailer. For the after-market fitting of a trailer towing

bracket see page 203.

Connectors

Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection

between the trailer and the vehicle.

If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is

available in any SEAT dealer.

Trailer weight / drawbar load

Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If you do not load the trailer up to

the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly

steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to

1000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and there-

fore the vehicles climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced air

density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The

weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for

every 1000 m of height. The gross combination weight is the actual weight of

the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer. When possible,

operate the trailer with the maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint

of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit.

The figures for trailer weight plate of the towing bracket a

figures for your specific mode

towing bracket, are given in t

nical Data.

Distributing the load

Distribute loads in the trailer

possible. Loads carried in the

moving.

Tyre pressure

Set tyre pressure to the maxim

on the inside of the fuel tank

accordance with the trailer m

Exterior mirrors

Check whether you can see e

standard mirrors. If this is no

fitted. Both exterior mirrors s

brackets. Adjust the mirrors t

WARNING

Never transport people in a

Note Towing a trailer places ad

mend additional services bet

vehicle is used frequently for

Trailer towing202

trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For

to drive at the maximum permissible speed in

r or wind conditions. This applies especially

ed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest

top the snaking by increasing speed.

the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the

, firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be

cking. Select a low gear in due course before

This enables you to use the engine braking to

during prolonged slopes, driving in a low gear

s monitor the coolant temperature gauge

e*

ilise the trailer in case of skidding or rocking.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 202 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your

country.

Ball coupling of towing bracket*

Depending on the model version, the spherical head on the trailer hook may

be stored in the tool box.

The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the

ball coupling of the towing bracket.

WARNING

The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing injury.

Note By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed

and it obscures the number plate.

Driving tips

Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.

Weight distribution

The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very

unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow

for the unbalanced weight distribution.

Speed

The stability of the vehicle and

this reason, it is advisable not

an unfavourable road, weathe

when driving downhill.

You should always reduce spe

sign of snaking. Never try to s

Always brake in due course. If

brakes gently at first and then

caused by the trailer wheels lo

going down a steep downhill.

slow down the vehicle.

Reheating

At very high temperatures and

and high engine speed, alway

page 55.

Electronic Stability Programm

The ESP* system helps to stab

Trailer towing 203

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

Fig. 153 Attachment points for towing bracket

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 203 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Fitting a towing bracket*

It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.

Trailer towing204

correctly installed, there is serious danger of

se observe the instructions provided by the racket.

rectly installed, this could cause damage to the

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 204 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be

completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.

The attachment points for the towing bracket are on the lower part of the

vehicle.

The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should

never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle and

including the maximum drawbar load.

Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:

65 mm (minimum)

350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)

344 mm

531 mm

1044 mm

1040 mm

Fitting a towing bracket

Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore,

before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre

to check whether your cooling system needs modification.

The legal requirements in your country must be observed (e.g. the fitting

of a separate warning lamp).

Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and

reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a

torque wrench, and a power socket must be connected to the vehicles elec-

trical system. This requires specialised knowledge and tools.

Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment

points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.

WARNING

The towing brackets should be fitted at a specialised workshop.

If the towing bracket is in accident.

For your own safety, plea manufacturer of the towing b

Caution If the power socket is incor

vehicles electrical system.

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

AG

WARNING (continued)

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 205

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

. The use of certain products may produce ld be used in well ventilated areas.

e, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other ic and highly flammable. Risk of fire and explo-

icle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch ndbrake firmly and remove the key from the

, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.

e for cleaning purposes. This could damage the

your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty

nvironment ts for your vehicle maintenance, select the ones

environment.

roducts should not be disposed of with ordinary

e disposal information on the package.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 205 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

General notes

Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your

vehicle.

Vehicle maintenance

Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may

also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the

event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.

The best way to protect your vehicle against the harmful effects of the envi-

ronment is through correct maintenance and frequent washing. The longer

substances such as insect remains, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road

dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive materials

remain on the vehicle, the more damage they do to the paintwork. High

temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive

effect.

After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have the

underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.

Products for vehicle maintenance

Car care products are available in your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the

product instructions until you have used them up.

WARNING

Car care products can be toxic. Because of this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of chil- dren. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using vehicle care products. Improper use could cause health prob-

lems or damage the vehicle noxious vapours; they shou

Never use fuel, turpentin volatile fluids. These are tox sion.

Before washing your veh the engine off, apply the ha ignition.

Caution Never attempt to remove dirt

Never use a dry cloth or spong

paintwork or the windows of

of water.

For the sake of the e When purchasing produc

which are not harmful to the

The waste from car care p

household waste. Observe th

WARNING (continued)

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning206

rinse it off with water.

top to bottom with a soft sponge, a glove

ht pressure.

ve often with clean water.

ould only be used for very stubborn dirt.

anels etc. until last, using a different

ughly with water.

gently with a chamois leather.

y the rubber seals and their surfaces to

zing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber

dden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes

s page 195, Braking capacity and

e ignition switched off.

rms from cuts on sharp metal edges when inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 206 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Vehicle exterior maintenance

Automatic car wash tunnel

The vehicle can normally be washed without problem in an

automatic car wash.

The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the vehicle can normally be washed

without problems in an automatic car wash tunnel. However, the paintwork

wear depends to a large extent on the kind of the car wash tunnel, the

brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative

products.

Before going through a vehicle wash, be sure to take the usual precautions

such as closing the windows and sunroof.

If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof rack or two-

way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash tunnel operator.

After washing, the brakes could take some time to respond as the brake discs

and pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by braking

several times.

WARNING

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of acci- dent.

Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the

aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.

Washing by hand

Vehicle washing

First soften the dirt and

Clean your vehicle from

or a brush. Use very lig

Rinse the sponge or glo

Special car shampoo sh

Leave the wheels, sill p

sponge or glove.

Rinse the vehicle thoro

Dry the vehicle surface

In cold temperature, dr

prevent them from free

seals.

After washing the vehicle

After washing, avoid su

by braking several time

braking distance.

WARNING

Wash your vehicle with th

Protect your hands and a cleaning the underbody, the injury.

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 207

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

distance for soft materials and painted

sure cleaner to remove ice or snow from

d jet nozzles (rotating jets) .

udden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes

es page 195.

concentrated jet (rotating nozzle). Even at d short cleaning times, visible and invisible es. This may cause an accident.

e brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of

an 60 C. This could damage the vehicle.

hicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive

es, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This is

ainted in the colour of the bodywork. The closer

he greater the wear on the material.

nce

s the paintwork.

r vehicle if water does not form small drops and

is clean.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 207 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident.

Caution Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a

dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork

or glass on your vehicle.

Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle with

a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the

doors, tailgate, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.

For the sake of the environment To protect environment, the vehicle should be washed only in specially

provided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the

sewerage system. In some places, washing vehicles outside wash bays is

prohibited.

Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner

Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!

Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,

particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance.

Increase the spraying

bumpers.

Do not use a high pres

windows page 208.

Never use concentrate

After washing, avoid s

by braking several tim

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a large spraying distances an damage can occur to the tyr

Water, ice and salt on th accident.

Caution Do not use water hotter th

To avoid damage to the ve

materials such as flexible hos

also important for bumpers p

the nozzle is to the surface, t

Vehicle paint maintena

Regular waxing protect

You need to apply wax to you

run off the paintwork when it

WARNING (continued)

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning208

c parts.

n plastic parts, clean them with approved

nd care products.

ner directly over the air vents of the vehicle may

liquid is accidentally spilled.

ontain solvents will damage the material.

xterior mirrors

ith commercially available, alcohol based

clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.

ove snow from the windows and mirrors.

eather to dry the windows. The chamois

ces are not suitable to clean windows because

sits which could smear the windows.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 208 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Good quality hard wax products are available at your Authorised Service

Centre.

Regular wax applications help to protect the paintwork from environmental

contaminants page 205. It is also effective in protecting against minor

scratches.

Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the vehicle washing tunnel, it is

advisable to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.

Polishing the paintwork

Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.

Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot

be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased in

your Authorised Service Centre.

The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain

wax compounds to seal the paint page 207, Vehicle paint maintenance.

Caution To prevent damage to the paintwork:

Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or

on plastic parts.

Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.

Caring for plastic parts

Solvents damage plasti

If normal washing fails to clea

solvent-free plastic cleaning a

Caution The use of liquid air freshe

damage the plastic parts if the

Cleaning products which c

Cleaning windows and e

Cleaning windows

Moisten the windows w

glass cleaner.

Dry the windows with a

Removing snow

Use a small brush to rem

Removing ice

Use a de-icer spray.

Use a clean cloth or chamois l

leathers used on painted surfa

they are soiled with wax depo

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 209

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

nce

looked after, they will not freeze so

ove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.

product to the rubber seals.

s, windows, bonnet and tailgate will remain

are treated with a suitable care product (for

lso prevent premature ageing and leaks. The

f rubber seals are well looked after, they will not

can freeze up in winter.

ou should only use spray with lubricating and

th a damp cloth.

ith a soft, dry cloth.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 209 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push

it in one direction only without swinging it.

Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and sili-

cone deposits off.

Wax deposits can be removed with a special cleaner available in your Author-

ised Service Centre. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper

blades to judder. Adding a window cleaner that dissolves wax to the wind-

screen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering, but wax deposits

are not removed.

Caution Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and

mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!

The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the

window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers on the heating elements

inside the window.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

Clean wiper blades improve visibility.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen

wiper blades.

2. Use window cleaner to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use a

sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn dirt.

Rubber seals maintena

If rubber seals are well

quickly.

1. Use a soft cloth to rem

2. Apply a specialist care

The rubber strips on the door

pliable and last longer if they

example silicone spray).

Caring for rubber seals will a

doors will be easier to open. I

freeze so quickly in winter.

Door lock cylinders

The door lock cylinders

To de-ice the lock cylinders y

anti-corrosive properties.

Cleaning chrome parts

1. Clean chrome parts wi

2. Polish chrome parts w

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning210

st from alloy wheels.

ent to clean the wheel rims.

ound to the wheels.

ttention to preserve their appearance. If road

ten removed, the aluminium finish will be

ent for alloy wheels.

ents should not be used. If the protective

ying stones, the damaged area should be

lindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances ible and invisible damage can occur to the

ident.

brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of ing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the

es page 195, Braking capacity and

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 210 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains from the surface.

Caution To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:

Never use an abrasive cleaning product on chrome.

Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.

Steel wheel rims

Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.

Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on

steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes by braking several times page 195, Braking capacity and braking distance.

Alloy wheels

Every two weeks

Wash salt and brake du

Use an acid free deterg

Every three months

Apply a hard wax comp

Alloy wheels require regular a

salt and brake dust are not of

impaired.

Always use an acid-free deterg

Car polish or other abrasive ag

coating is damaged, e.g. by fl

repaired immediately.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a cy and short cleaning times, vis tyres. This may cause an acc

Water, ice and salt on the accident. Directly after wash brakes by braking several tim braking distance.

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 211

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

is usually removed if the engine compartment

ing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.

ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and

mpartment are given anti-corrosion treatment.

ine compartment, always observe the safety

et, switch the engine off, apply the handbrake e key from the ignition.

before you clean the engine compartment.

underbody, wheel arches or wheel trims ds and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp- comply could result in injury.

the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk shing, avoid sudden and sharp braking.

fan. It is temperature-controlled and could en the key is removed from the ignition!

nvironment could be removed when the engine is washed.

leaned in an oil separator. For this reason,

be carried out at a specialised workshop or an

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 211 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Underbody protection

The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical

and mechanical damage.

The protective coating can be damaged when driving. We recommend you to

check the protective coating under the body and on the running gear, and

reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.

We recommend you to go to your Authorised Service Centre to carry out repair

work and additional anti-corrosion work.

WARNING

Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite. Risk of fire.

Cleaning the engine compartment

Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.

Anti-corrosion treatment

The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-

corrosion treatment at the factory.

Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the vehicle

is frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,

the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and

after winter.

Your Authorised Service Centre has got the necessary equipment to provide

the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we recommend

having this work performed by them.

The anti-corrosion protection

is cleaned with grease remov

On commissioning this work,

components in the engine co

WARNING

When working in the eng warnings page 219.

Before opening the bonn firmly and always remove th

Allow the engine to cool

Do not clean the vehicle without protecting your han edged metal parts. Failure to

Moisture, ice and salt on of accident. Directly after wa

Never touch the radiator start automatically, even wh

For the sake of the e Fuel, grease and oil deposits

The polluted water must be c

engine washing should only

adequate petrol station.

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning212

bric trim cleaning

m on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned

or with dry foam and a soft brush.

climate controls

ate controls, use a soft damp cloth. For more

olution may be used.

ollen cloth with water and wipe over the

be removed using a mild soap solution

ablespoons diluted in one litre of water)

k through the leather or soak into the

ft, dry cloth.

reated twice a year with a special leather-

in your Authorised Service Centre.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 212 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Vehicle interior maintenance

Plastic parts and dash panel cleaning

Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash

panel.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special

solvent-free plastic cleaning product.

WARNING

Never clean the dash panel and the airbag module surface with cleaners containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the airbag triggered, plastic parts could become detached and cause injuries.

Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Wooden trim cleaning*

Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap

solution.

Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Cloth seat covers and fa

Cloth seat covers and fabric tri

with a special interior cleaner

Cleaning the radio and

To clean the radio and/or clim

resistant dirt, a neutral soap s

Leather cleaning*

Normal cleaning

Moisten a cotton or wo

leather surfaces.

Cleaning stubborn stains

More stubborn dirt can

(pure liquid soap; two t

and a cloth.

Do not let the water soa

seams.

Then wipe off with a so

Leather maintenance

The leather should be t

care product, available

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 213

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

lt up until it is dry.

ts, it will not retract correctly into the automatic

ning agents on the seat belts, as this can ebbing. Ensure that belts do not come into .

e seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice s, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the ust be replaced by a specialised workshop.

a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.

ts to dry completely before rolling them up.

could become damaged.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 213 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Apply these products very sparingly.

Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.

SEAT does everything possible to preserve the genuine qualities of this

natural product. Due to the natural properties of the specially selected hides

employed, the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, etc.

so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking after the

leather.

Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If

the vehicle is under solar radiation for long periods, the leather should be

protected to prevent it from fading. However, slight colour variations in high-

quality natural leather are normal.

Caution Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar

products on leather.

To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a specialised

workshop.

Seat belt cleaning

A dirty belt may not work properly.

Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.

Seat belt cleaning

Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.

Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.

Allow it to dry.

Do not roll the seat be

If large stains form on the bel

belt retractor.

WARNING

Do not use chemical clea impair the strength of the w contact with corrosive fluids

Check the condition of th that the belt webbing, fitting belts is damaged, the belt m

Do not attempt to repair must not be removed or mod

Caution After cleaning, allow seat bel

Otherwise, the belt retractors

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications214

onents that do not affect the control of the

box, laptop, ventilator fan, etc.), must bear the

ufacturer conformity declaration).

phone holders or cup holders, should never thin the working range, of the airbags. Other-

ry if the airbag is triggered in an accident.

tions

ys be carried out according to our

the electronic components or software in the

ns. Due to the way the electronic components

, other indirect systems may be affected by the

ir safety, lead to excessive wear of compo-

r vehicle registration documents.

es cannot be held liable for any damage

or work incorrectly performed.

d that all work should be performed by an

ng Genuine SEAT approved parts and acces-

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 214 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications

Accessories and spare parts

Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before

purchasing accessories and parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.

Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical

changes to your vehicle, we recommend you to consult your Authorised

Service Centre.

SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information

about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-

turer regarding accessories and parts.

We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in

question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Authorised Service Centres have

the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and

professionally installed.

Despite a continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess

the reliability, safety and suitability of those parts SEAT has not approved. For

this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts

used, even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or

are covered by an official approval certificate.

Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the

drivers control of the vehicle (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-

controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the

European Unions authorisation symbol).

Any additional electrical comp vehicle itself (e.g. refrigerator

CE mark (European Union man

WARNING

Accessories, for example tele be fitted on the covers, or wi wise, there is a danger of inju

Technical modifica

Modifications must alwa

specifications.

Unauthorised modifications to

vehicle may cause malfunctio

are linked together in networks

faults. This can seriously impa

nents, and also invalidate you

SEAT Authorised Service Centr

caused by modifications and/

For this reason, we recommen

Authorised Service Centre usi

sories.

Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 215

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

arily on driving. If you are distracted while cident.

ne mountings to the surfaces covering the nge of the airbags. There is a high danger of ed.

instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 215 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

WARNING

Incorrectly performed modifications or other kind of work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.

Roof aerial*

The vehicle may be fitted with a foldable* and anti-theft* aerial that may be

positioned parallel to the roof.

To fold down

Unscrew the rod, position parallel to the roof and tighten once again.

To return to working position

Continue in the reverse order to the previous instruction.

Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the

aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.

Mobile phones and two-way radios

First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-

phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of

10watts. Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibil-

ities for retrofitting this equipment.

Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a specialised

workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.

WARNING

Always concentrate prim driving you could have an ac

Never attach the telepho airbag units or within the ra injury if the airbag is trigger

Note Please observe the operating

radio.

Checking and refilling levels216

e right, until the point of feeling a click.

, without releasing the cap, clockwise

se the flap until it clicks into place. The

h an anti-loss attachment

he vehicle on the right.

operated correctly, it will switch itself off as

er attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will

el may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.

vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the

n fuel can be found there.

and can cause serious burns and other inju-

open flame when filling the fuel tank of the nister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.

nts for the use of spare fuel canisters.

o not recommend carrying a spare fuel e canister could be damaged in an accident

ances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, points:

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 216 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Checking and refilling levels

Refuelling

The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi-

mately 55 litres. For all-wheel drive vehicles, the tank

capacity is approximately 60 litres.

Unscrewing the tank cap

Lift the lid.

Hold the cap firmly with one hand, then insert the key into the

lock and rotate 180 to the left.

Unscrew the cap, turning it anti-clockwise.

Closing the tank cap

Screw the tank cap to th

Turn the key in the lock

through 180.

Remove the key and clo

tank cap is secured wit

The tank flap is at the rear of t

If the automatic filler nozzle is

soon as the tank is full. Nev

fill the expansion chamber. Fu

The correct fuel grade for your

fuel tank flap. Further notes o

WARNING

Fuel is highly flammable ries.

Never smoke or use an vehicle, or a spare fuel ca

Follow legal requireme

For safety reasons we d canister in the vehicle. Th and leak.

If, in exceptional circumst please observe the following

Fig. 154 Tank flap open

Checking and refilling levels 217

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

are listed on a sticker inside the fuel

ing to standard DIN EN 228 may be used for

ters (EN = European Standard).

by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON

, unit for determining the knock resistance of

ith a higher octane number than the one recom-

ever, this has no advantage in terms of fuel

er.

vehicle is given in the technical table for the

section.

28 may be mixed with small quantities of

ed bioethanol fuels available at commercial

e E50 or E85, which contain a high percentage

as they will damage the fuel system.

d fuel would permanently impair the efficiency

ll throttle can damage the engine when using

ower than the correct grade for the engine.

nvironment el would seriously impair the efficiency of the

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 217 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec- trostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to ignite. This could cause an explosion. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.

Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible.

If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro- static charge building up.

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.

Caution Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.

Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause

misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and

cause damage.

For the sake of the environment Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;

this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Petrol

Petrol types

The correct petrol types

tank flap.

Only unleaded petrol conform vehicles with catalytic conver

Fuel types are differentiated

= Research Octane Number

petrol). You may use petrol w

mended for your engine. How

consumption and engine pow

The correct fuel type for your

engine, in the Technical Data

Caution Petrol with standard EN 2

ethanol. However, the so-call

establishments with referenc

of ethanol, may not be used,

Even one tankful of leade

of the catalytic converter.

High engine speed and fu

petrol with an octane rating l

For the sake of the e Just one full tank of leaded fu

catalytic converter.

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels218

n designed to be used exclusively with diesel

590. Never refuel or use petrol, kerosene, fuel

you accidentally fill up the vehicle with the

t the engine. Seek assistance from specialised

f these fuels may severely damage the fuel

ter.

el, difficulties may be experienced at tempera-

uel thickens due to wax separation. Therefore,

n some countries during the cold months. It can

w as -22 C.

atic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold

racteristics. Check with an Authorised Service

country concerned regarding the type of diesel

l filter glow plug system, making it well

ter. This ensures that the fuel system remains

rovided you use winter-grade diesel which is

to such an extent that the engine will not start

C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for

ners or similar products) with diesel fuel.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 218 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Petrol additives

Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.

The quality of the petrol influences the performance, power and life of the

engine. For this reason, you should use good quality petrol containing addi-

tives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel system

clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.

If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems occur,

the required additives must be added during refuelling.

Diesel

Diesel*

Diesel fuel must conform to DIN EN 590 (EN = European Standard). It must

have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates the

ignition quality of the diesel fuel.

Notes on refuelling page 216.

Biodiesel*

Caution Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any circumstances refuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage

the engine and the fuel system. The addition of biodiesel to diesel fuel by the

diesel manufacturer in accordance with standard EN 590 or DIN 51628 is

authorised and will not cause damage to the engine or the fuel system.

The diesel engine has bee

fuel conforming to standard EN

oil or any other type of fuel. If

wrong type of fuel, do not star

personnel. The composition o

system and the engine.

Winter driving

Diesel can thicken in win

Winter diesel

When using summer diesel fu

tures below 0 C because the f

winter diesel fuel is available i

be used at temperatures as lo

In countries with different clim

has different temperature cha

Centre or filling stations in the

fuels available.

Filter pre-heater

Your vehicle is fitted with a fue

equipped for operation in win

operational to approx. -24 C, p

safe to -15 C.

However, if the fuel has waxed

at temperatures of under -24

a while.

Caution Do not mix fuel additives (thin

Checking and refilling levels 219

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

the engine compartment, e.g. checking and k of injury and scalding as well as the risk of

f you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping nt. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining eam or coolant is emitted, then allow the lly opening the bonnet.

d remove the key from the ignition.

d move the gear lever to neutral or selector

the vehicle.

arts. There is a risk of burns.

ot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This

uits in the electrical system, particularly at the are attached page 269. The battery could

fan. It is temperature controlled and could en the engine has been switched off and the

on!

n the coolant reservoir when the engine is hot. ling system will be pressurised!

arms by covering the cap with a large, thick ping coolant and steam.

ve not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths partment.

rneath the vehicle, you must use suitable rt the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A

for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 219 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Working in the engine compartment

Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment

Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the

engine must be carried out cautiously.

Before starting any work on the engine or in the engine compart-

ment:

1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.

2. Apply the handbrake.

3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the selector lever to position P.

4. Wait for the engine to cool down.

5. Keep children away from the vehicle.

6. Raise the bonnet. page 221

You should not do any work in the engine compartment unless you know

exactly how to carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! Have the work

carried out by a specialised workshop if you are uncertain.

All service fluids and consumables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and

batteries, are being constantly developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of

information to the Authorised Service Centres concerning modifications. For

this reason, we recommend you to have service fluids and consumables

replaced by an Authorised Service Centre. Please observe the relevant

instructions page 214. The engine compartment of the vehicle is a

hazardous area. .

WARNING

All work on the engine or in refilling fluids, involves a ris accident or fire.

Never open the bonnet i from the engine compartme burns. Wait until no more st engine to cool before carefu

Switch off the engine an

Apply the handbrake an lever to position P.

Keep children away from

Never touch hot engine p

Never spill liquids on a h is a fire hazard.

Avoid causing short-circ points where the jump leads explode.

Never touch the radiator start automatically, even wh key removed from the igniti

Do not unscrew the cap o If the coolant is hot, the coo

Protect face, hands and cloth to protect against esca

Always make sure you ha and tools, in the engine com

If you have to work unde stands additionally to suppo hydraulic jack is insufficient injury.

Checking and refilling levels220

, have your vehicle inspected at a specialised

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 220 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe the following points:

Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.

Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and long hair do not get trapped in rotating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any work remove jewellery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting clothes.

Never accelerate with a gear engaged without taking the necessary precautions. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of death.

If work has to be carried out on the fuel system or on electrical compo- nents, you must observe the following safety notes in addition to the above warnings:

Always disconnect the battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when this is done, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.

Do not smoke.

Never work near naked flames.

Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.

Caution When topping up service fluids, make sure not to mistake them. Using the

wrong fluids could cause serious malfunctions and engine damage!

For the sake of the environment Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you

should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you

find spots of oil or other fluids

workshop. WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 221

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

t ensure that the windscreen wipers are in

pull the lever under the dash panel

in the direction indicated (arrow). The

d by a spring action .

he release lever (arrow) and open the

y and secure it in fixture designed for this

f you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping nt.

, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet, net.

ine compartment, always observe the safety

tly

y and replace it in its support.

cm let it fall so it is locked.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 221 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Opening the bonnet

The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.

Before opening the bonne

rest position.

To release the bonnet,

page 221, fig. 155

bonnet will be release

Lift the bonnet using t

bonnet.

Release the bonnet sta

in the bonnet.

WARNING

Hot coolant can scald!

Never open the bonnet i from the engine compartme

Wait until no more steam then carefully open the bon

When working in the eng warnings page 219.

Closing the bonnet

Raise the bonnet sligh

Release the bonnet sta

At a height of about 30

Fig. 155 Detail of foot- well area on driver side: lever for unlocking the bonnet.

Fig. 156 Arrester hook for bonnet.

Checking and refilling levels222

or your engine are listed in page 223, Oil

le (LongLife service) or fixed (dependent on

the back of the Maintenance Programme

at your vehicle has the LongLife service

s QG0 or QG2 the interval service is dependent

gLife*)

ve been developed which, depending on the

driving profiles, allow to extend the oil change

vals).

r extending the service intervals, it must only

ng indications:

fixed service intervals.

stances, if the engine oil level is too low

s not available, it is permitted to top up (once)

als page 223 (up to a maximum of 0.5

he LongLife service interval or it has been

y use oils for fixed service intervals, which also

roperties. In this case, your vehicle must be

of 1 year / 15,000 km (whatever comes first)

gramme.

es, if the engine oil level is too low

btain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can

onforming to the specification ACEA A2 or

EA B3 or ACEA B4 (diesel engines) (up to 0.5 l).

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 222 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it once more and

let it fall as before.

WARNING

If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.

After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.

If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk of accident.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, high quality, multi grade oil that can be

used in all seasons of the year except for those regions affected by extreme

cold.

As the use of good quality oil is necessary for the correct operation and long

service life of the engine, when it becomes necessary to replenish or change

the oil, always use an oil that complies with VW standards.

The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should

appear on the container of the service oil; when the container displays the

specific standards for petrol and diesel engines together, it means that the

oil can be used for both types of engines.

We recommend that the oil change, indicated in the Maintenance

Programme, be performed by an Authorised Service Centre or a specialised

workshop.

The correct oil specifications f

properties.

Service intervals

Service intervals can be flexib

time/distance travelled).

If the PR code that appears on

booklet is QG1, this means th

programmed. If it has the code

on time/distance travelled.

Flexible service intervals (Lon

Special oils and processes ha

characteristics and individual

service (LongLife service inter

Because this oil is essential fo

be used observing the followi

Avoid mixing it with oil for

Only in exceptional circum

page 223 and LongLife oil i

with oil for fixed service interv litres).

Fixed service intervals*

If your vehicle does not have t

disabled (by request), you ma

appear in page 223, Oil p

serviced after a fixed interval

Booklet Maintenance Pro

In exceptional circumstanc

page 223 and you cannot o

put in a small quantity of oil c

ACEA A3 (petrol engines) or AC

Checking and refilling levels 223

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration

not covered by the warranty.

end finding an engine oil that conforms to the

ions and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the

be available for a top-up if needed.

l level

indicates the level of the oil.

orizontal position.

Fig. 157 Engine oil dipstick

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 223 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*

The Maintenance Programme states whether your vehicle is fitted with a

diesel particulate filter.

Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash formation, may be used in

diesel engines equipped with particulate filter. Using other types of oil will

cause a higher soot concentration and reduce the life of the DPF. Therefore:

Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.

Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low

page 223 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can

use a small quantity of oil (once) conforming to the VW 506 00, VW 506 01,

VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or ACEA B3 / ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).

Oil properties

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be

caused by these additives is

Note Before a long trip, we recomm

corresponding VW specificat

correct engine oil will always

Checking the engine oi

The engine oil dipstick

Checking oil level

Park the vehicle in a h

Engine type Specification

Petrol without flexible service inter-

val

VW 502 00/ VW 504 00

Petrol with flexible service interval

(LongLife)

VW 504 00

Diesel. Engines without Particulate

filter (DPF)

VW 505 01 / VW 506 01 / VW 507 00

Diesel. Engines with particulate filter

(DPF)

With or without flexible service inter-

val (with or without LongLife)a)

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.

VW 507 00

Checking and refilling levels224

a do not start the engine. This could result

catalytic converter. Contact an Authorised

all quantities of oil.

, read and observe the warnings in

rking in the engine compartment on

ler opening fig. 158.

unts, using the correct oil.

AA

Fig. 158 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 224 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the service temperature

is reached and stop.

Wait two minutes.

Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and

insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.

Then pull it out once more and check the oil level fig. 157. Top

up with engine oil if necessary.

Oil level in area

Do not add oil.

Oil level in area

Oil can be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after the zone

Oil level in area

Oil must be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after in zone

Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the vehicle is used,

oil consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be

higher for the first 5000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be

checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a

journey.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 219.

Caution If the oil level is above the are

in damage to the engine and

Service Centre.

Topping up engine oil

Top up gradually with sm

Before opening the bonnet

Safety instructions on wo

page 219.

Unscrew cap from oil fil

Top-up oil in small amo

AA

AB

AA

AC

AA

Checking and refilling levels 225

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

changed at the intervals given in the

the engine oil changed by an Authorised

hown in the Maintenance Programme.

if you have the specialist knowledge required!

et, read and observe the warnings tions on working in the engine compartment.

ol down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.

void injuries caused by splashes of oil.

rain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori- m running down your arm.

ly if it comes into contact with engine oil.

Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of

with engine oil. This could result in engine

by the use of such additives would not be

ty.

nvironment roblems, the necessary special tools and

d, we recommend that you have the engine oil

orised Service Centre.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 225 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using

small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before

adding any more oil.

As soon as the oil level is in area , carefully close the cap.

The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine

compartment illustration page 279.

Engine oil specification page 222.

WARNING

Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine components when topping up.

Caution If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result

in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a specialised work-

shop.

For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in

through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the

exhaust system.

Changing engine oil

The engine oil must be

service schedule.

We recommend that you have

Service Centre.

The oil change intervals are s

WARNING

Only change the oil yourself

Before opening the bonn page 219, Safety instruc

Wait for the engine to co

Wear eye protection to a

When removing the oil d zontal to help prevent oil fro

Wash your skin thorough

Engine oil is poisonous! the reach of children.

Caution No additives should be used

damage. Any damage caused

covered by the factory warran

For the sake of the e Because of the disposal p

specialist knowledge require

and filter changed by an Auth

AB

AA

AA

Checking and refilling levels226

e added in sufficient quantities to provide coldest ambient temperatures that can be utside temperatures, the coolant could breakdown. As the heater would not work ing to death.

onsiderably inferior corrosion protection. The

ing system can lead to a loss of coolant,

e engine.

) can be mixed with the G12 (red) or G11 addi-

G11.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 226 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.

Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be large

enough to hold all the engine oil.

Coolant

Coolant specifications

Coolant is a mixture of water and at least 40% coolant addi-

tive.

The cooling system must be filled with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of

our G12+ additive or an additive with the TT-VW 774 F specification (it has a

purple colour). This mixture provides the necessary freeze protection down to

-25 C and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It

also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant.

The concentration of coolant must always be at least 40% - even if freeze

protection is not required.

If greater freeze protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of

the G12+ additive can be increased. However, the percentage of coolant addi-

tives should not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the freeze protection. It

would also reduce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60% additive will give

antifreeze protection to approx. -40 C.

WARNING

The coolant additive is toxic. There is a toxic risk. Always keep the coolant additive in the original container which should be stored out of the reach of children. The same applies to coolant which you have drained off.

The G12+ additive must b anti-freeze protection at the expected. At extremely cold o freeze, causing the vehicle to either, there is a risk of freez

Caution Other additives may give c

resulting corrosion in the cool

causing serious damage to th

The G12+ additive (purple

tive. Never mix G12 (red) with

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 227

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

MIN mark, top up with coolant.

liquid.

AX mark.

sion tank

n tightly.

pansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding

ion page 279.

eets the required specifications page 226.

additive if G12+ additive is not available. In this

g the coolant concentration back up to the

ible by putting in the specified additive

nt.

ark. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced

en the engine is hot.

yed purple) may be mixed with G12 (dyed red)

ngine compartment or on the engine must be

ine compartment, always observe the safety

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 227 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Checking the coolant level and topping up

The correct coolant level is important for fault-free func-

tioning of the engine cooling system.

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in

Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on

page 219.

Opening the coolant expansion tank

Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.

To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the expansion tank with a

thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap .

Checking coolant level

Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the

coolant level.

If the level is below the

Topping up coolant

Only use new coolant

Do not fill above the M

Closing the coolant expan

Screw the cap on agai

The position of the coolant ex

engine compartment illustrat

Make sure that the coolant m

Do not use a different type of

case use only water and brin

correct level as soon as poss

page 226.

Always top up with new coola

Do not fill above the MAX m

out of the cooling system wh

The coolant additive G12+ (d

and also with G 11.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the e carried out cautiously.

When working in the eng warnings page 219.

Fig. 159 In the engine compartment: Coolant expansion tank cap

Checking and refilling levels228

indscreen wiper blades

he windscreen should always be

.

e headlight washers are supplied with fluid

luid container in the engine compartment.

right-hand side of the engine compartment.

ean the windscreen and headlights. We recom-

roduct to the windscreen washer fluid.

g products exist on the market with high deter-

s, these may be added all-year-round. Please

s on the packaging.

Fig. 160 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 228 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is a burn injury risk.

Caution When mixed with other additives the colour of G12 will change to brown.

If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do

so will result in engine damage!

If a lot of coolant fluid has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down

before putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large

coolant losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a special-

ised workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Other-

wise, there is a risk of engine damage.

Washer fluid and w

Topping up washer fluid

The water for cleaning t

mixed with washer fluid

The windscreen washer and th

from the windscreen washer f

The reservoir is located on the

Plain water is not enough to cl

mend that you always add a p

Approved windscreen cleanin

gent and anti-freeze propertie

follow the dilution instruction

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 229

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

iper blades

blades are in perfect condition, you

roved visibility. Damaged wiper

ced immediately.

Fig. 161 Windscreen wipers in the service posi- tion

Fig. 162 Changing the front wiper blades

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 229 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 219.

Caution Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen

washer fluid.

Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per

instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes

in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.

Changing windscreen w

If the windscreen wiper

will benefit from an imp

blades should be repla

Checking and refilling levels230

good visibility through all windows!

er blades and all windows regularly.

be changed once or twice a year.

en wipers could scratch the windscreen.

h remover, paint thinner or similar products to

damage the windscreen wiper blades.

n wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This

wipers forward unless they are in the service

t could be damaged.

ved to the service position only when the

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 230 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

To change the blades it is necessary to change the rest position of

the wipers to the service position.

Service position (For changing wiper blades)

Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.

Turn ignition on and off and then (before approx. 8 seconds have

elapsed), move the windscreen wiper lever to the intermittent

wipe position. The windscreen wipers will move to the service

position.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.

Push the side buttons, free the blade and pull in the direction of

the arrow page 229, fig. 162

Fitting the wiper blade

Insert a blade of identical length and design into the wiper arm.

Slide the blade until it clicks into position.

Push the wiper arms back against the windscreen.

The windscreen wiper arms return to their original position when the ignition

is turned on and the windscreen wiper lever is operated, or when driving

faster than 6 km/h.

If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are damaged,

or cleaned if they are soiled.

If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-

screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a special-

ised workshop and corrected if necessary.

WARNING

Do not drive unless you have

Clean the windscreen wip

The wiper blades should

Caution Damaged or dirty windscre

Never use fuel, nail varnis

clean the windows. This could

Never move the windscree

could cause damage.

Do not pull the windscreen

position. Otherwise the bonne

Note The wiper arms can be mo

bonnet is properly closed.

Checking and refilling levels 231

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

e good visibility through all windows!

per blades and all windows regularly.

be changed once or twice a year.

w wiper could scratch the rear window.

h remover, paint thinner or similar products to

en wiper by hand. This could cause damage.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 231 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Changing the rear wiper blade

A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision.

Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.

Removing the wiper blade

Lift the rear wiper arm.

Release the blade by pulling it in the direction of the arrow .

Fitting the wiper blade

Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreen wiper arm until it

clicks into place.

Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.

If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned

if soiled.

If this is not sufficient, refer to a specialised workshop.

WARNING

Do not drive unless you hav

Clean the windscreen wi

The wiper blades should

Caution A damaged or dirty windo

Never use fuel, nail varnis

clean the window.

Never move the windscre

Fig. 163 Changing the rear window wiper blade

A2

Checking and refilling levels232

n noticeably in a short time, or drops below the

ak in the brake system. A display on the instru-

brake fluid level is too low page 76.

check the brake fluid level, read and observe

d

mme indicates the brake fluid

the brake fluid changed by an Authorised

lease read and follow the warnings in

g in the engine compartment on page 219 in

ing in the engine compartment.

In the course of time, it will absorb water from

ntent in the brake fluid is too high, the brake

o considerably reduces the boiling point of the

rakes may then cause a vapour lock which

t.

ly brake fluid compliant with US standard

end the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid.

brake fluid impairs the braking effect.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 232 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Brake fluid

Checking the brake fluid level

The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the service

schedule.

Read off the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It

should always be between the MIN and MAX marks.

The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine

compartment illustration page 279. The brake fluid reservoir has a black

and yellow cap.

The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the

brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.

However, if the level goes dow

MIN mark, there may be a le

ment panel will warn you if the

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet to the warnings page 219.

Changing the brake flui

The Maintenance Progra

change intervals.

We recommend that you have

Service Centre.

Before opening the bonnet, p

Safety instructions on workin

section Safety notes for work

Brake fluid absorbs moisture.

the ambient air. If the water co

system could corrode. This als

brake fluid. Heavy use of the b

could impair the braking effec

It is important that you use on

FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recomm

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous. Old

Fig. 164 In the engine compartment: Brake fluid reservoir cover

Checking and refilling levels 233

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

the battery

er of injury and chemical burns as well as the working on the battery and the electrical

tect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and

sive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and e batteries. This could spill acid through the m eyes immediately for several minutes with cal care immediately. Neutralise any acid hing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with allowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-

s and smoking are prohibited. When handling ent, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic

ction

very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective

protection!

pen flames and smoking are prohibited!

sive mixture of gases is released when the bat-

arge.

away from acid and batteries!

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 233 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings page 219.

Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.

Complete the brake fluid change according to the Maintenance Programme. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This would seriously affect the effi- ciency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may cause an acci- dent.

Caution Brake fluid could damage the paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the

paintwork immediately.

For the sake of the environment The brake pads and fluid must be collected and disposed of according the

applicable regulations. The SEAT Technical Service network has the necessary

equipment and qualified personnel for collecting and disposing of this waste

material.

Vehicle battery

Warnings on handling

WARNING

Always be aware of the dang risk of accident or fire when system:

Wear eye protection. Pro particles containing lead.

Battery acid is very corro eye protection. Do not tilt th vents. Rinse battery acid fro clear water. Then seek medi splashes on the skin or clot plenty of water. If acid is sw ately.

Fires, sparks, open flame cables and electrical equipm

WARNING (continued)

Wear eye prote

Battery acid is

gloves and eye

Fires, sparks, o

A highly explo

tery is under ch

Keep children

Checking and refilling levels234

g in cold conditions for a long period, protect

freezes it will be damaged.

e level

uld be checked regularly in high-

countries and in older batteries.

t and the battery cover in Safety

in the engine compartment on

rnings on handling the battery on

y in the "magic eye" on the top of the

n the window, tap the window gently until

hown in the corresponding engine compart-

ated on the top of the battery changes colour,

e and electrolyte level of the battery.

:

s.

he battery must be replaced. Contact a special-

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 234 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause injury.

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.

Keep children away from acid and batteries.

Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch off the light.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.

When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.

Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.

Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0 C.

Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.

Never use a defective battery. This could cause an explosion. Replace a damaged battery immediately.

Caution Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine

is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-

nents.

Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as

the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.

If the vehicle is left standin

the battery from freezing. If it

Checking the electrolyt

The electrolyte level sho

mileage vehicles, in hot

Open the engine bonne

instructions on working

page 219 in Wa

page 233.

Check the colour displa

battery.

If there are air bubbles i

they disperse.

The position of the battery is s

ment diagram page 279.

The magic eye indicator, loc

depending on the charge stat

There are two different colours

Black: correct charge statu

Transparent/clear yellow: t

ised workshop.

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels 235

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

nvironment nces such as sulphuric acid and lead. They

iately and must not be disposed of with ordinary

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 235 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Charging and changing the vehicle battery

The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the

inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires

specialist knowledge.

If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long

periods, the battery should be checked by a specialised workshop between

the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the

battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have the

vehicle battery checked by an Authorised Service Centre where it will be re-

charged or replaced.

Charging the battery

The vehicle battery should be charged by a specialised workshop only, as

batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be

charged in a controlled environment.

Replacing a vehicle battery

The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has

special safety features.

Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety spec-

ifications of your vehicle.

WARNING

We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which comply with standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of 2001.

Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe the warnings in Warnings on handling the battery on page 233.

For the sake of the e Batteries contain toxic substa

must be disposed of appropr

household waste.

Wheels and tyres236

ften not readily visible. If you notice unusual

g to one side, this may indicate that one of the

ould be checked immediately by an Authorised

ttern

ndicates the direction of rotation on tyres with

rve the direction of rotation indicated when

ees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-

wear.

ximum grip during the first 500 km. Drive possible accidents.

tyres. This may cause an accident.

ations or if the vehicle pulls to one side when ediately and check the tyres for damage.

e can be seen on the sticker on the

nflation pressure from the sticker. The

tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2

on the sticker.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 236 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Wheels and tyres

Wheels

General notes

Avoiding damage

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very

slowly and at a right angle.

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,

etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.

Storing tyres

When you remove the tyres, mark them in order to maintain the

same direction of rotation when they are installed again.

When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a

cool, dry and preferably dark location.

Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel

rims.

New tyres

New tyres must be run in page 195.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre

and the tread pattern.

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is o

vibrations or the vehicle pullin

tyres is damaged. The tyres sh

Service Centre.

Tyres with directional tread pa

An arrow on the tyre sidewall i

directional tread. Always obse

fitting the wheel. This guarant

planing, excessive noise and

WARNING

New tyres do not have ma particularly carefully to avoid

Never drive with damaged

If you notice unusual vibr driving, stop the vehicle imm

Checking tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressur

inside of the tank flap.

1. Read the required tyre i

values refer to Summer

bar to the values given

Wheels and tyres 237

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ng

toring system constantly checks the

ensors of the ABS wheels. It operates by

uency spectrum of each wheel.

e genuine SEAT tyres. In addition, check and

ly.

are changed or one or more tyres are changed,

y pressing the SET switch on the centre console.

n the event of a loss of pressure by means of

instrument panel display. The system uses ESP

epends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure

ach 10 C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre

being driven and the tyre pressure will rise

you should only adjust the tyre pressures when

ely at ambient temperature).

re monitoring system works reliably, you should

st the tyre pressures at regular intervals and

eference values) in the system.

bel is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.

re when the tyres are hot. This may damage or accident!

tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and f the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre tyre may burst. Risk of accident!

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 237 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are

cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be

reduced.

3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.

Tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure

should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a

journey.

The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the

tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. Do not reduce the

slightly raised pressures of warm tyres .

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.

A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!

At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.

If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema- turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.

Tyre pressure monitori

The tyre pressure moni

pressure of the tyres.

The system uses the speed s

analysing the speed and freq

For optimum performance, us

adjust tyre pressures regular

Whenever the tyre pressures

the system should be Reset b

The system warns the driver i

symbols and messages in the

page 189.

Note that tyre pressure also d

increases about 0.1 bar for e

heats up while the vehicle is

accordingly. For this reason,

they are cold (i.e. approximat

To ensure that the tyre pressu

check and, if necessary, adju

store the correct pressures (r

A tyre pressure information la

WARNING

Never adjust tyre pressu even burst the tyres. Risk of

An insufficiently inflated causes significant heating o bead may be released or the

Wheels and tyres238

dependent on tyre pressure, driving

Fig. 165 Tyre tread wear indicators

Fig. 166 Diagram for changing wheels

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 238 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.

Significant tyre pressure loss

The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure of at least

one tyre is insufficient.

Stop the vehicle.

Switch the engine off.

Check the tyre(s).

Change the wheel if necessary page 246.

Tyre service life

The service life of tyres is

style and fitting.

Wheels and tyres 239

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!

ed at the latest when the tread is worn down to ilure to do so could result in an accident. Worn

h speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater

eds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes eat. This can cause tread separation and tyre lways observe the recommended tyre pres-

ear, you should have the running gear checked ntre.

oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.

res must be replaced immediately!

nvironment ase fuel consumption.

to continue driving even with a punc-

ity of cases.

-fitted with run-flat tyres22) the loss of tyre

he instrument panel.

country.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 239 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Wear indicators

The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators

page 238, fig. 165, running across the tread. Depending on the make,

there will be 6 to 8 of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on the

tyre sidewall (for instance the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the

positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by

law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indica-

tors). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export

countries .

Tyre pressure

Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.

For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month

page 236.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.

Changing wheels around

If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable

to change them around as shown page 238, fig. 166. All the tyres will then

last for about the same time.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-

tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results

in steering vibration.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive

wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced

when a new tyre is fitted.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of

the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel align-

ment checked by an Authorised Service Centre.

WARNING

There is a serious danger of

The tyres must be replac the tread wear indicators. Fa tyres do not grip well at hig risk of aquaplaning.

At continuously high spe more. This causes it to overh blow-out. Risk of accident. A sures.

If tyres show excessive w by an Authorised Service Ce

Keep chemicals such as

Damaged wheels and ty

For the sake of the e Under-inflated tyres will incre

Run-flat tyres

Run-flat tyres allow you

tured tyre, in the major

In vehicles that are factory

pressure is indicated on t

22) Depending upon version and

Wheels and tyres240

of the tyres,

to continue driving even using run-flat tyres?

severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a tyre

e is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown

uel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.

riving if severe vibrations occur, or if the wheel

ff smoke.

onditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is

speed of 80 km/h is subject to road and bserve legal requirements when doing so.

id manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usual.

les (for example kerbs) or potholes.

eing driven in emergency conditions, the is impaired and there is a risk of accident.

eflate on losing pressure because they are

ides. Therefore defects in the tyre cannot be

ion.

sed on front tyres used in emergency

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 240 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Driving with run-flat tyres (emergency running)

Leave the ESP/TCS (Electronic Stability Programme) switched on,

or switch on page 189.

Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h maximum).

Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.

Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.

Look out for the ESP/TCS intervening often, smoke coming from

the tyres or the smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrating or a clat-

tering noise. If any of these occur, stop the vehicle.

The run-flat tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:

DSST, Eufonia, RFT, ROF, RSC, SSR or ZP.

The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are

supported on the sides (emergency driving).

The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can

then drive a maximum of 80 km and if the circumstances are favourable (for

example, low load), even more.

The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should be

checked in a specialised workshop to detect possible damage and replace it

if necessary. We recommend you contact Technical Service. If more than one

tyre is being used under emergency conditions, this reduces the distance

which can be travelled.

Starting driving in emergency conditions

When loss in tyre pressure is displayed on the instrument panel, this means

that at least one tyre is being driven in emergency conditions .

End of emergency operation

Do not drive on if:

smoke is coming from one

there is a smell of rubber,

the vehicle vibrates,

there is a rattling noise.

When is it no longer possible

If one of the tyres has been

has been badly damaged ther

off and cause damage to the f

It is also advisable to stop d

starts overheating and gives o

WARNING

When driving in emergency c considerably impaired.

The maximum permitted weather conditions. Please o

Avoid sharp turns and rap

Avoid driving over obstac

If one or more tyres are b driving quality of the vehicle

Note The run-flat tyres do not d

supported on the reinforced s

detected with a visual inspect

Snow chains must not be u

conditions.

Wheels and tyres 241

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

as well as the proper facilities for disposing of

e has full information on the technical require-

nging tyres, wheels or wheel trims.

ive, all four tyres must always be fitted with tyres

read pattern, as otherwise the driveline can be

rences in the wheel speeds. For the same

el with the same tyre dimensions as the normal

e the factory-supplied compact temporary spare

use only wheels and tyres which have been odel. Failure to do so could impair vehicle

e on tyres that are more than 6 years old. If you uld drive slowly and with extra care at all

ose with an unknown history of use.

ted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the could cause them to overheat.

fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size he same tread pattern.

nvironment f according to the laws in the country concerned.

not generally possible to use the wheels from

apply to wheels of the same model. The use of

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 241 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

New tyres and wheels

New tyres and wheels have to be run in.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicles design. The

tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics

of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe

handling .

Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front

tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it

easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations

marked on the sidewall, for example:

195/65 R15 91T

This contains the following information:

195 Tyre width in mm

65 Height/width ratio in %

R Tyre construction: Radial

15 Rim diameter in inches

91 Load rating code

T Speed rating

The tyres could also have the following information:

A direction of rotation symbol

Reinforced denotes heavy-duty tyres.

The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only

on the inner side of the wheel).

DOT... 1103... means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th

week of 2003.

We recommend that work on tyres and wheels be carried out by an Authorised

Service Centre. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary

special tools and spare parts

the old tyres.

Any Authorised Service Centr

ments when installing or cha

On vehicles with all-wheel dr of the same type, make and t

damaged by continuous diffe

reason, only use a spare whe

road wheels. You may also us

wheel.

WARNING

We recommend that you approved by SEAT for your m handling. Risk of accident.

Avoid running the vehicl have no alternative, you sho times.

Never use old tyres or th

If wheel trims are retrofit brakes is not restricted. This

All four wheels must be (rolling circumference) and t

For the sake of the e Old tyres must be disposed o

Note For technical reasons, it is

other vehicles. This can also

Wheels and tyres242

ue for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is

e the vehicles handling on snow and

es will considerably improve the vehicles

er tyres (width, rubber compound, tread

and snow.

o a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures

e sticker on tank flap).

all four wheels.

er tyre sizes can be found in the vehicles regis-

adial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the

pply to winter tyres.

eness when the tread is worn down to a depth

241, New tyres and wheels determines the

ter tyres:

hich can exceed the speed rating of the fitted

sticker in the drivers field of view. These

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 242 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your

model may invalidate the vehicles type approval for use on public roads.

If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the

vehicle (e.g. winter tyres) you should only use the spare tyre for a short period

of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as

possible.

Wheel bolts

Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.

The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are

fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt

heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the

brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not use wheel bolts from a different

vehicle, even if it is the same model page 214.

After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tight-

ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become loose while driving. Risk of accident.

The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.

Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.

If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.

Caution The prescribed tightening torq

120 Nm.

Winter tyres

Winter tyres will improv

ice.

In winter conditions winter tyr

handling. The design of summ

pattern) gives less grip on ice

Winter tyres must be inflated t

specified for summer tyres (se

Winter tyres must be fitted on

Information on permitted wint tration documents. Use only r

vehicle documentation also a

Winter tyres lose their effectiv

of 4 mm.

The speed rating code page

following speed limits for win

Q max. 160 km/h

S max. 180 km/h

T max. 190 km/h

H max. 210 km/h

In some countries, vehicles w

tyre must have an appropriate

Wheels and tyres 243

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ectly tightened in accordance with the manu- will prevent the chains coming into contact

rive on roads without snow. Otherwise they will

tyres and wear out very quickly.

eed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The

ntry should be followed.

sk your Authorised Service Centre for informa-

l, tyre and snow chain size.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 243 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-

ments of each country must be followed.

Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with

summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.

If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel

page 241, New tyres and wheels.

WARNING

The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to tyre damage and risk of accident.

For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possible. They are quieter, do not wear

so quickly and reduce fuel consumption.

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels, and only for 205/55R16

tyres. These tyres may only be fitted with fine-pitch link chains which do not

protrude more than 15 mm page 241. For 225/50R17 tyres, the use of

snow chains is not permitted.

Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety

reasons cover caps, available in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be

fitted over the wheel bolts.

All-wheel drive: Where snow chains are compulsory on certain roads, this

normally also applies to cars with all-wheel drive. Snow chains may only be

fitted to the front wheels (also on vehicles with all-wheel drive).

WARNING

Snow chains should be corr facturers instructions. This with the wheel housing.

Caution Remove the snow chains to d

impair handling, damage the

Note In some countries, the sp

legal requirements of the cou

We recommend that you a

tion about appropriate whee

If and when244

* is only designed for changing wheels on this t to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other

, level ground.

en the vehicle is on the jack. Risk of accident.

underneath the vehicle, this must be secured e, there is a risk of injury.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 244 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

If and when

Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel

Vehicle Tools

The vehicle onboard tools are located under the floor panel in

the luggage compartment.

Lift the cover of the luggage compartment, by pulling it up with a

finger in the fitting.

Take the on-board tools out of the vehicle.

The tool kit includes:

Jack*

Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps*

Box spanner for wheel bolts*

Reversible screwdriver with handle (including hexagonal interior) for the

wheel bolts. The screwdriver is a combination tool.

Towing eye

Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

Some of the items listed are only provided in certain model versions, or are

optional extras.

WARNING

Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten the wheel bolts as with this it is not possible to tighten the bolts to the required torque. Risk of accident.

The factory-supplied jack model. On no account attemp loads. Risk of injury.

Use the jack* only on firm

Never start the engine wh

If work is to be carried out by suitable stands. Otherwis

WARNING (continued)

If and when 245

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

hains must not be used on the compact tempo-

of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit

in place of one of the rear wheels. You can then

wheel taken from the rear and use this wheel to

heel.

be checked and corrected as soon as possible. e for dimensions 125/70R16 125/70R18 other tyre dimensions please refer to the label so could result in an accident.

0 km/h. Higher speeds can cause an accident.

, hard braking and fast cornering. Risk of acci-

mpact spare tyres at the same time, risk of

rmal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on e wheel rim.

hicles not including a spare wheel) is

anel in the luggage compartment.

re, your vehicle is equipped with the Tyre

a container with sealing compound to repair the

generate the required tyre pressure. The kit will

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 245 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Compact temporary spare wheel*

The compact spare wheel (emergency wheel for vehicles

without the anti-puncture kit) should only be used when

strictly necessary.

The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage

compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.

How to use the temporary spare wheel

Should you ever have a punctured tyre, the temporary spare wheel is only

intended for temporary use until you can reach a workshop. The standard-size

road wheel should be replaced as soon as possible.

Please note the following restrictions when using the temporary spare wheel.

This spare wheel has been specially designed for your vehicle, thus, it cannot

be changed with the spare wheel from another vehicle.

No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the

compact temporary spare wheel rim.

Snow chains

For technical reasons, snow c

rary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one

the compact temporary spare

attach the snow chains to the

replace the punctured front w

WARNING

The tyre pressures must The emergency tyre pressur 135/90R16 is 4.2 bar; for all on the fuel cap. Failure to do

Do not drive faster than 8

Avoid heavy acceleration dent.

Never use two or more co accident.

No other type of tyre (no the compact temporary spar

Tyre repair kit

The tyre repair kit (for ve

stored under the floor p

In the event of a punctured ty

Mobility System.

The tyre repair kit consists of

puncture and a compressor to

Fig. 167 Luggage compartment. Access to the spare wheel

If and when246

on and place the warning triangle in position. d also warns other road users.

on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the

ng a stone or similar object under it to prevent

ents when doing so.

ribed below

o see page 247.

s.

ck at the corresponding point.

then fit the spare wheel.

firmly with the box spanner.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 246 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the penetration

of a foreign body into the tyre.

Note Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not

possible with the sealing compound.

Changing a wheel

Preparation work

What you must do before changing a wheel.

If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away

from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as

level as possible.

All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a

safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).

Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.

Apply the handbrake firmly.

Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for

those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.

Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage

compartment.

WARNING

Put the hazard warning lights This is for your own safety an

Caution If you have to change the tyre

wheel being changed by placi

the vehicle from rolling away.

Note Please observe legal requirem

Changing a wheel

Change the wheel as desc

Pull off the hub cap. Als

Slacken the wheel bolt

Raise the car with the ja

Remove the wheel and

Lower the vehicle.

Tighten the wheel bolts

Replace the hub cap.

If and when 247

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

e removed to gain access to the wheel

ook from the tools into the designated

the bolt hole covers of the wheel cover

Fig. 168 Changing the wheel: Removing a hub cap

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 247 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

After changing a wheel

After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete.

Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.

Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compart-

ment and secure it.

Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as

possible.

Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as

possible with a torque wrench. The prescribed torque must be

120 Nm.

Note If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when

changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt torque

checked.

For safety reasons, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt tight-

ening torque has been checked.

Wheel trims

The wheel trims must b

bolts.

Removing

Insert the extraction h ring, located in one of

fig. 168.

Pull off the hub cap.

If and when248

lts

loosened before raising the vehicle.

ar as it will go over the wheel bolt.

y the end turn it about one full turn to the

ar as it will go over the wheel bolt.

close to the end and turn the bolt to the

o unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel

Fig. 169 Changing the wheel: loosen the wheel bolts

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 248 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Wheel covers*

The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel

bolts

Removing

Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook.

Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover.

Fitting

Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put

pressure initially on the point of the cut-out for the valve. Then

press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so that it engages all

round.

Loosening the wheel bo

The wheel bolts must be

Loosening

Fit the box spanner as f

Grasp the box spanner b

left fig. 169.

Tightening

Fit the box spanner as f

Grasp the box spanner

right until it is secured.

An adapter is required t

bolts.

If and when 249

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 249 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

WARNING

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack, otherwise there is a risk of accident.

Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or

tighten the wheel bolts.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing

down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle

for support and take care not to slip.

If and when250

t under the door sill closest to the wheel

70.

jacking point and turn the crank until the

ly below the vertical rib under the door

e arm of the jack fits around the rib under

vable base plate of the jack is flat on the

efective wheel is just clear of the ground.

of the door sills mark the jacking points

acking point for each wheel. Do not fit the jack

jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.

ed on solid ground offering good support. Use

essary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as

lar to prevent the jack from slipping.

at the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to ent.

ed if the jack is not applied at the correct a risk of injury since the jack can slip off engaged.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 250 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Raising the vehicle

In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised with

a jack.

Locate the jacking poin

to be changed fig. 1

Place the jack under the

arm of the jack is direct

sill.

Align the jack so that th

the door sill and the mo

ground fig. 171.

Raise the jack until the d

Recesses at the front and rear

fig. 170. There is only one j

anywhere else.

An unstable surface under the

Therefore, the jack must be fitt

a large and stable base, if nec

tiles) use a rubber mat or simi

WARNING

Take all precautions so th do so could result in an accid

The vehicle can be damag jacking points. There is also suddenly if it is not properly

Fig. 170 Jack position points

Fig. 171 Fitting the jack

If and when 251

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

e wheel

the wheel, the following tasks must be

bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack,

ribed below:

g the hexagonal tool in the handle of the

ol) and place them on a clean surface

lts and tighten them lightly using the

e screwdriver handle.

Fig. 173 Changing the wheel: Hexagonal socket in screwdriver handle to turn the wheel bolts

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 251 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Jack position points for vehicles with sill panel trim*

Vehicles with plastic sill panel trim, with cover*

Remove the cap to access the anchor point for the vehicle jack

fig. 172.

Pull on the cover and remove it from its allotment in the direction

of the arrow fig. 172.

Once the cover has been released, it will remain connected to its

strap so that is not lost.

Removing and fitting th

For removal and fitting

completed.

After loosening the wheel

change the wheel as desc

Removing a wheel

Unscrew the bolts usin

screwdriver (vehicle to

fig. 173.

Fitting a wheel

Screw in the wheel bo

hexagonal socket in th

Fig. 172 Plastic sill panel trim with jack allotment cover

AA

If and when252

the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it

ar as it will go over the adapter.

heel bolt as appropriate.

eft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part of

oted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by

duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an

ead pattern

ad pattern must be fitted so that they

ction.

be identified by arrows on the sidewall that

n. Always note the direction of rotation indi-

This is important so that these tyres can give

ssive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.

to fit the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong

mely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum

rly important when driving on wet roads.

s of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the

ced as soon as possible so that all tyres again

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 252 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

The wheel bolts should be clean and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare

wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfaces. These

surfaces must be clean before fitting the wheel.

The hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle makes it easier to turn the

wheel bolts. The reversible screwdriver blade should be removed when the

tool is used for this purpose.

If tyres with a specific direction of rotation are fitted, note the direction of

rotation.

Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or

tighten the wheel bolts.

Anti-theft wheel bolts*

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel

bolts.

Insert the adapter onto

will go fig. 174.

Fit the box spanner as f

Loosen or tighten the w

Code

The code number of the anti-th

the adaptor.

The code number should be n

using the code number that a

Authorised Service Centre.

Tyres with directional tr

Tyres with directional tre

rotate in the correct dire

A directional tread pattern can

point in the direction of rotatio

cated when fitting the wheel.

maximum grip and avoid exce

If, in an emergency, you have

direction, you must drive extre

performance. This is particula

To benefit from the advantage

defective tyre should be repla

rotate in the correct direction.

Fig. 174 Anti-theft wheel bolt

If and when 253

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

nvironment lant can, go to a specialised waste service or to

re the product can be recycled in an appropriate

, leave it to dry. This way you can pull it off like a

tated on the sealing compound can. Have the

d by a specialised workshop.

nce if the repair of a tyre puncture is not

pound.

aken before repairing a tyre.

r puncture, park the vehicle as far away

as possible.

irmly.

ut the selector lever to position P.

leave the vehicle. They should wait in a

behind the roadside crash barrier).

is possible using the Tyre Mobility System

nd safety notes.

from the affected wheel.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 253 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Tyre repair kit (Tyre Mobility System)*

General information and safety notes

Your vehicle is equipped with a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.

In the event of a tyre puncture, a sealing compound and an air compressor are

located in the luggage compartment under the floor panel.

The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetra-

tion of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter.

It is not necessary to remove the foreign body from the tyre.

Instructions for the sealing compound are located on the sealing compound

container.

You will also find instructions for operating the compressor.

WARNING

Do not attempt to repair a puncture with the sealing compound if the tyre has been damaged by driving the vehicle after the tyre has lost its air.

Always observe warnings and follow instructions concerning compressor and sealing compound carefully.

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h, avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.

Tyres which have been repaired with sealing compound are only suit- able for temporary use over a short period. Therefore, please drive carefully to the next available specialised workshop.

For the sake of the e If you have to dispose of a sea

a SEAT Technical Service, whe

waste container.

Note If sealant should leak out

piece of foil.

Observe the expiry date s

sealing compound exchange

Seek professional assista

possible with the sealing com

Preparation work

Certain steps must be t

If you have a flat tyre o

from the flow of traffic

Apply the handbrake f

Engage first gear, or p

All passengers should

safe area (for instance

Check whether a repair

General information a

Unscrew inflation cap

If and when254

monitor the pressure shown on the pres-

r hose from the valve.

from the socket.

proper storing location.

with tyre pressure control, enter the new tyre

n on the centre console.

ver be allowed to run for longer than 6

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 254 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Take the tyre repair kit out of the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.

Caution Take special care if you have to repair a tyre on a slope.

Note Please observe legal requirements when doing so.

Tyre repair

The following sections describe the procedures for repairing

a tyre.

Using the sealing compound

The instructions on the container give detailed information on

how to use the sealing compound.

Inflating the tyre.

Remove the air compressor and hose from the container.

Screw the retaining nut onto the valve.

Plug the compressor cable into a 12 volt power socket.

Turn on compressor and

sure gauge.

Completing the repair

Remove the compresso

Fit the valve cap.

Unplug the compressor

Return all tools to their

Note If the vehicle is equipped

pressures using the SET butto

The compressor should ne

minutes.

If and when 255

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

e steering wheel

and the component concerned.

ponding to the damaged electric

.

m inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the

e fuse out.

e (which will have a melted metal strip)

same ampere rating.

partment

and its failed electrical component.

in the engine compartment by pressing

entre of the cover fig. 176.

e affected component page 257.

m inside the fuse cover (at left-hand end

t onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out.

e (which will have a melted metal strip)

same ampere rating.

ver back on to ensure no water can enter

its are protected by fuses. The fuses are located

d end of the dash panel and on the left-hand

ent.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 255 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Fuses

Changing a fuse

Blown fuses must be replaced

Fuse cover underneath th

Switch off the ignition

Identify the fuse corres

consumer page 257

Take the plastic clip fro

blown fuse and pull th

Replace the blown fus

with a new fuse of the

Fuse cover in engine com

Switch off the ignition

Remove the fuse cover

the tabs towards the c

Identify the fuse for th

Take the plastic clip fro

of the dash panel), fit i

Replace the blown fus

with a new fuse of the

Carefully fit the fuse co

the fuse box.

The individual electrical circu

behind a cover at the left-han

side of the engine compartm

Fig. 175 Left side of dash panel: Fuse box cover

Fig. 176 Fuse box cover in engine compartment

If and when256

igher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to

cal system.

uses in the vehicle. These are available from

ed in the following tables, there are other fuses

Technical Service Workshop.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 256 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

The electric windows are protected by circuit breakers. These reset automat-

ically after a few seconds when the overload (caused for example by frozen

windows) has been corrected.

Fuses colour code

WARNING

Never repair damaged fuses and never replace them with fuses with a higher rating. Failure to comply could result in fire. This could also cause damage to other parts of the electrical system.

Note If a newly replaced fuse blows again after a short time, the electrical

system must be checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

If you replace a fuse with h

another location in the electri

Always keep some spare f

SEAT dealers.

In addition to the fuses list

which must be replaced by theColour Amps

light brown 5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

Natural (white) 25

Green 30

orange 40

Red 50

white 80

Blue 100

grey 150

violet 200

If and when 257

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ng aid) / Gear lever/ ESP switch- 10

sensor/ Alarm horn 5

sensor / Light switch 10

installation assistant 15

20

creen) 10

er motor 20

/ socket 20

40

it (coupling) 15

Consumer Amps

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 257 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Fuses on left side of dash panel

Fuses

Number Consumer Amps

1 Vacant

2 Vacant

3 Vacant

4 Vacant

5 Vacant

6 Vacant

7 Vacant

8 Vacant

9 Airbag 5

10 RSE input (roof screen) 10

11 Vacant

12 Left xenon headlight 10

13

Instrument panel (oil level)/Switchboard wiring

(BCM)/Heater / ABS, ESP/ Park Pilot/ Gate-

way/Flow meter

5

14 Gearbox/Power steering/Brake light sensor/

Trailer/ ABS, ESP/ Haldex/ Light switch 10

15

Heated windscreen / Instrument lighting / Diag-

nosis switchboard/Engine management/Addi-

tional heating/AFS headlamps/Park Pilot

10

16 Right xenon headlight 10

17 Engine management 10

18 Vacant

19 Vacant

20 Park Pilot (parki

board

21 Vacant

22 Volumetric alarm

23 Diagnosis / Rain

24 Trailer hook pre-

25 Vacant

26 Vacuum pump

27 RSE input (roof s

28 Rear window wip

29 Vacant

30 Cigarette lighter

31 Vacant

32 Vacant

33 Heater

34 Vacant

35 Vacant

36 Vacant

37 Vacant

38 Vacant

39 Trailer control un

Number

If and when258

, while correct at the time of printing, is subject

should occur, please refer to the sticker on the

correct information for your model.

mpartment, left part

Consumer Amps

rs 20

30

it 5

20

15

l/Steering column 5

40

15

om Navigator 5

ent 5

ent 10

l unit 5

odule supply 15

odule supply 30

20

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 258 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain

models or are optional extras.

Please note that the above list

to alterations. If discrepancies

inside of the fuse cover for the

Fuses layout, engine co

Fuses

40 Trailer control unit (turn signals, brakes and left

side) 20

41 Trailer control unit (fog light, reverse light and

right side) 20

42 BCM wiring switchboard 20

43 Trailer pre-installation 40

44 Heated rear window 25

45 Electric windows (front) 30

46 Rear electric windows 30

47 Engine (Fuel control unit, petrol relay) 15

48 Convenience controls 20

49 Heating controls 40

50 Heated seats 30

51 Sunroof 20

52 Headlight washer system 20

53 Trailer hook pre-installation assistant 20

54 Taxi (taximeter power supply) 5

55 Trailer hook pre-installation assistant 20

56 Taxi (taximeter power supply) 15

57

58 Central locking control unit 30

Number Consumer Amps

Number

1 Windscreen wipe

2 DQ200 gearbox

3 Cable control un

4 ABS

5 AQ gearbox

6 Instrument pane

7 Ignition key

8 Radio

9 Telephone/TomT

10 Engine managem

Engine managem

11 Vacant

12 Electronic contro

13 Petrol injection m

Diesel injection m

14 Coil

If and when 259

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

st turn off the failed component.

Fingerprints vaporise in the heat, causing a

condensation on the mirror surface, thus

d by one of the same type. The type is inscribed

ss part or on the base.

keep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. At the

e bulbs, which are essential for road safety,

.

ts 4)

bulb changes must be made by the SEAT dealer, given

e removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made

m incorporated.

5 times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5

n bulbs, this means that, except due to unusual circum-

ange the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 259 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Bulb change

General notes

Before changing any bulb, fir

Do not touch the bulb glass.

reduction in the bulb life and

reducing efficiency.

A bulb should only be replace

on the bulb, either on the gla

It is highly recommended to

very least, the following spar

should be kept in the vehicle

Main headlights

Dipped beam - H7

Main beam - H1

Position - W5W

Turn signal - PY21W

Xenon23)/adaptive headligh

Dipped and full beam - D1S2

Daylight - P21W SLL

Position W5W

Turn signals PY21W

15 Engine management 5

Pump relay 10

16 Right lighting 30

17 Horn 15

18 Vacant

19 Clean 30

20 Water pump 10

Pressure sensor pump for 1.8 engine 20

21a) Lambda probe 15

22 Brake pedal, speed sensor 5

23a)

Engine management 5

Engine management 10

Engine management 15

24 AKF, gearbox valve 10

25a) ABS pump 40

26 Left lighting 30

27a) Engine management 40

Engine management 50

28 Vacant

29a) Electric windows (front and back) 50

Electric windows (front) 30

30 Ignition key 50

a) Ampere rating according to motorisation

Number Consumer Amps

23) On this type of headlight, the

that complex elements must b

on the automatic control syste 24) The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.

times more than that of haloge

stances, there is no need to ch

If and when260

Fig. 177 Main headlight bulbs

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 260 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Fog lights

Fog lights - H3

Fixed tail light

Stop/Position - P21W25)

Turn signal - P21W

Mobile tailgate light

Fog light (driver side) - P21W

Reverse (passenger side) - P21W

Position - W5W

Side turn signal

Side turn signal - W5W

Number plate light

Number plate light - C5W

Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog

lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has

no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on the

lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be

demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.

Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior

lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest

of your own safety, but also that of all other road users.

Due to the difficulty in accessing some of the bulbs, any replacement work

should be done by a SEAT dealer. However, the following is a description of

how to change the lamps except for the fog lights* and interior lamps.

Main headlight bulbs

Turn signal

Dipped beam headlights

Main beam headlights

Side lights

25) Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it

will not work in either position or Stop.

AA

AB

AC

AD

If and when 261

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ts

Fig. 179 Dipped beam headlights

Fig. 180 Dipped beam headlights

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 261 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Turn signal bulbs

Raise the bonnet.

Rotate the bulb holder fig. 178 to the left and pull.

Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and rotating at

the same time to the left.

Installation is done in the reverse order.

Dipped beam headligh

Raise the bonnet.

Fig. 178 Turn signal

AA

If and when262

. 181 by pulling on this.

fig. 182 from the bulb.

182 inwards and to the right.

the replacement so that it sits correctly

reflector.

he reverse order.

Fig. 182 Main beam headlights

AC

A1

A2

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 262 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Remove the loops page 261, fig. 179 in the direction of

the arrow and remove the cover.

Remove the connector page 261, fig. 180 from the bulb.

Unclip the retainer spring page 261, fig. 180 pressing

inwards to the right.

Remove the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the

attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.

Main beam headlights

Raise the bonnet.

Remove the cover fig

Remove the connector

Press the spring fig.

Extract the bulb and fit

into the cut-out on the

Installation is done in t

A1

A2

A3

Fig. 181 Main beam headlights

If and when 263

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

r fig. 184 outwards.

lling it out and inserting the replacement.

the reverse order.

ke light

ghts.

rse.

A1

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 263 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Side lights

Raise the bonnet.

Remove the cover fig. 183 by pulling on this.

Extract the bulb holde

Replace the bulb by pu

Installation is done in

Tail lights

On the body

Turn signal, side and bra

On the tailgate

Left side: side and fog li

Right side: side and reveFig. 183 Side lights

Fig. 184 Side lights

AD

If and when264

the left fig. 186.

and change it for a new one.

in reverse order, taking special care when

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 264 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Turn signal, side and brake lights on the body

Open the cover of the luggage compartment side panel

fig. 185.

Turn the bulb holder to

Remove the blown bulb

To refit follow the steps

fitting the bulb holder.

Fig. 185 Lights on vehicle body

Fig. 186 Lights on vehicle body

If and when 265

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ut pressing on the securing tabs and

b and replace it with another.

in reverse order, taking special care when

t

the left.

b and replace it with another.

the reverse order.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 265 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Side light, fog light and reverse light on the tailgate

Side lights

Open the tailgate.

Pull the cover off.

Take the bulb holder o

extract it outwards.

Remove the blown bul

To refit follow the steps

fitting the bulb holder.

Fog light and reverse ligh

Open the tailgate.

Pull the cover off.

Turn the bulb holder to

Remove the blown bul

Installation is done in

Fig. 187 Lights on the tailgate

Fig. 188 Side lights

If and when266

lights

ssing on the inside edge of this -arrow-

screwdriver fig. 190.

Fig. 190 Luggage compartment light

Fig. 191 Luggage compartment light

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 266 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Side turn signals

Press the turn signal to the left or to the right to remove the bulb.

Remove the bulb holder from the turn signal.

Remove the faulty bulb and replace with a new one.

Insert the bulb holder in the turn signal guide until it clicks into

place.

First place the turn signal in the opening in the bodywork, fixing

the tabs fig. 189, arrow .

Insert the bulb as shown by the arrow fig. 189.

Luggage compartment

Remove the bulb by pre

using the flat side of a

Fig. 189 Side turn signal

A1

A2

If and when 267

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ver, unscrew the bolts fig. 192.

ing it in the direction of the arrow and

the reverse order.

Fig. 193 Number plate light

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 267 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Press the bulb sideways and remove it from the housing

page 266, fig. 191.

Registration light

To remove the light co

Remove the bulb, mov

outwards fig. 193.

Installation is done in Fig. 192 Number plate light

If and when268

ng it in the direction of the arrow and

e a sufficient wire cross section.

use of a discharged battery, the battery can be

other vehicle to start the engine.

standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturers docu-

tion must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines

l engines.

h each other, otherwise electricity could flow as

are connected.

st be properly connected to the vehicle elec-

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 268 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Sun visor light

Carefully remove the lamp, using the flat side of the screwdriver,

as shown in the figure fig. 195.

Remove the bulb, movi

outwards fig. 195.

Jump-starting

Jump leads

The jump lead must hav

If the engine fails to start beca

connected to the battery of an

Jump leads

Jump leads must comply with

mentation). The wire cross sec

and at least 35 mm2 for diese

Note The vehicles must not touc

soon as the positive terminals

The discharged battery mu

trical system.

Fig. 194 Removing sun visor light

Fig. 195 Removing sun visor light

If and when 269

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

e red jump lead to the positive terminal

. 197 of the vehicle with the flat

of the red jump lead to the positive

icle providing assistance .

art-Stop system, connect one end of the

negative terminal in the vehicle

fig. 196.

tart-Stop system, connect one end of the

suitable ground terminal, to a solid metal

ne block or to the engine block itself

of the black jump lead to a solid metal

he engine block or to the engine block

h the flat battery. Do not connect it to a

.

uch a way that they cannot come into

g parts in the engine compartment.

vehicle with the boosting battery and let

vehicle with the flat battery and wait one

e engine is running.

e jump leads, switch off the headlights (if

A+

AB

A-

B

AX

AA

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 269 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

How to jump start: description

Jump lead terminal connections

1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles .

2. Connect one end of th

fig. 196 or fig

battery .

3. Connect the other end

terminal in the veh

4. On vehicles with no St black jump lead to the

providing assistance

5. On vehicles with the S black jump lead to a

part bolted to the engi

fig. 197.

6. Connect the other end

component bolted to t

itself of the vehicle wit

point near the battery

7. Position the leads in s

contact with any movin

Starting

8. Start the engine of the

it run at idling speed.

9. Start the engine of the

or two minutes until th

Removing the jump leads

10. Before you remove th

they are switched on).

Fig. 196 Diagram for connecting jump leads if the vehicle providing assistance the current is not fitted with the Start- Stop system: flat battery

and battery providing current . AA

AB

Fig. 197 Diagram for connecting jump leads if the vehicle providing assistance is fitted with the Start-Stop system: flat battery and battery providing current

.

AA

AB

A+

AA

A+

A

AX

If and when270

f the battery clamps must not be allowed to d to the positive battery terminal must not cle, this can cause a short circuit.

a way that they cannot come into contact engine compartment.

eries. This could result in chemical burns.

ach other, otherwise electricity could flow as

are connected.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 270 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

11. Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehicle

with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are

generated when the leads are disconnected.

12. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse

order to the details given above.

Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with

the battery terminals.

If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and

try again after about half a minute.

WARNING

Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 219, Working in the engine compartment.

The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.

Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.

Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.

Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.

The non-insulated parts o touch. The jump lead attache touch metal parts of the vehi

Position the leads in such with any moving parts in the

Do not bend over the batt

Note The vehicles must not touch e

soon as the positive terminals

WARNING (continued)

If and when 271

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

ing points if you use a tow-rope:

towing vehicle

til the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate

rs cautiously. If you are driving an auto-

te gently.

ke servo and power steering are not

you are towing. Brake sooner than normal

l gently.

towed vehicle

pe remains taut at all times when towing.

vehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a

tow-bar.

elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.

pe made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic

w-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a

ence, especially when using a tow-rope. Both

h the technique required for towing. Inexperi-

mpt to tow.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 271 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Towing and tow-starting

Tow-starting

The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.

We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting

is preferable page 268.

However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:

Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.

Keep the clutch pressed down.

Switch the ignition on.

Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.

As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear

lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing

vehicle.

WARNING

The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle.

Caution When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

General notes

Please observe the follow

Notes for the driver of the

Drive slowly at first un

gradually.

Begin and change gea

matic vehicle, accelera

Remember that the bra

working in the vehicle

and pressing the peda

Notes for the driver of the

Ensure that the tow-ro

Tow-rope or tow-bar

It is easier and safer to tow a

tow-rope if you do not have a

A tow-rope should be slightly

It is advisable to use a tow-ro

material.

Attach the tow-rope or the to

towing bracket.

Driving style

Towing requires some experi

drivers should be familiar wit

enced drivers should not atte

If and when272

ed more than 50 km, the front wheels should

owing should be carried out by a qualified

d when the vehicle has no electrical power. The

ith the front wheels raised. Towing should be

on.

ays be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the

tarting.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 272 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the

tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-

loading and damaging the anchorage points.

The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the

steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,

horn, windscreen wipers and washers.

As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply

considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.

As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you

will need more strength to steer than you normally would.

The vehicle must not be towed faster than 50 km/h.

The vehicle must not be towed faster than 50 km/h.

Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox

Put the selector lever into position N.

Do not drive faster than 50 km/h.

Do not tow further than 50 km.

If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front

wheels raised.

Note Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.

Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe

any regulations to the contrary.

For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be

tow-started.

If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,

you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.

If the vehicle has to be tow

be raised during towing, and t

person.

The steering wheel is locke

vehicle must then be towed w

carried out by a qualified pers

The towing eye should alw

notes on page 271, Tow-s

If and when 273

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

r by pressing down on its left-hand side.

by pressing down on the right hand side.

nti-clockwise, in the direction of the arrow,

the front fig. 198 or rear fig. 199

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 273 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Trailer eyes

Fitting the towing eye

Take the towing ring from the on-board tool set.

Remove the front cove

Remove the rear cover

Screw the towing eye a

to the limit position in

threaded hole.

Fig. 198 The front right section of the vehicle: Fitting the front towing eye

Fig. 199 Fitting the towing eye to the rear of the vehicle

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 274 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Description of specifications 275

Safety Fir l Tips Technical Specifications

viations used in the Technical Specifications section

revia- on

Meaning

W Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

S Pferdestrke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine

power.

m Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

m Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

0 km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km.

km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km travelled.

O2 Carbon dioxide

N Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.

N Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance

of petrol.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 275 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practica

Technical Specifications

Description of specifications

Important information

Important

The information in the vehicle documentation always has

precedence.

All technical specifications provided in this manual are valid for the standard

model in Spain. The vehicle data card included in the Inspection and Mainte-

nance Plan in the vehicle documents shows which engine is installed in the

vehicle.

The figures may be different depending on if additional equipment is fitted,

for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.

Abbre

Abb ti

k

P

rp

N

l/10

g/

C

C

RO

Description of specifications276

he inside of the spare wheel recess in the

rovided on the vehicle data sticker: fig. 200

in the Maintenance Programme.

r

ber (chassis number)

ne power output

letters

ior trim code

s

ided in the Maintenance Programme.

km) / CO2 emissions (g/km), urban.

km) / CO2 emissions (g/km), road.

km) / CO2 emissions (g/km), combination.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 276 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Vehicle identification data

The most important information is given on the identification

plate and the vehicle data sticker.

Vehicles for certain export countries do not have an identification plate.

Identification plate

The identification plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compart-

ment.

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside

the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-

hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located

on the right hand side of the engine compartment.

Vehicle data

The data sticker is placed on t

luggage compartment.

The following information is p

These data are also provided

Production control numbe

Vehicle identification num

Model code number

Model designation / engi

Engine and gearbox code

Paintwork number / inter

Optional equipment code

Consumption values

CO2 emission values.

Data from 2 to 9 are also prov

Consumption figures and CO2

Consumption (litres/100

Consumption (litres/100

Consumption (litres/100

Fig. 200 Vehicle data sticker (luggage compart- ment)

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

AA

AB

AC

Description of specifications 277

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicles handling and lead to an acci- eed and driving style to suit road conditions

xle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight ad or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the

vehicle may change, leading to accidents, ehicle.

ar loads approved are selected in intensive

efined criteria. The approved trailer weights are

r maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain

h). The figures may be different in other coun-

ehicle documents take precedence over these

bar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket

we recommend that you always tow

rawbar load. The response of the trailer on the

ar load is too small.

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 277 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Information on fuel consumption

Fuel consumption

The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle

data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.

The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions of the vehicle can be found on the

vehicle data sticker.

The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the vehicle

weight category, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox

combination and the equipment fitted.

The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the

tests indicated in regulations 715/2007/EC and 692/2008/EC.

Note Actual consumption may vary from quoted test values, depending on

personal driving style, road and traffic conditions, the weather and the

vehicle condition.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity

and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the

weight of the driver.

For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of

accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase .

WARNING

Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Always adjust your sp and requirements.

Never exceed the gross a rating. If the allowed axle lo driving characteristics of the injuries and damage to the v

Towing a trailer

Trailer weights

Trailer weight

The trailer weights and drawb

trials according to precisely d

valid for vehicles in the EU fo

circumstances up to 100 km/

tries. All data in the official v

data .

Drawbar load

The maximum permitted draw

must not exceed 75 kg.

In the interest of road safety,

approaching the maximum d

road will be poor if the drawb

Description of specifications278

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 278 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,

empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with a

wheelbase of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a

legal stipulation for a drawbar load.

WARNING

For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h limit. This is also valid in countries where higher speeds are permitted.

Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Technical Specifications 279

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

tions and restrictions on the technical data are

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 279 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Technical Specifications

Checking fluid levels

From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the

vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids,

otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank

Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

Engine oil filler cap

Engine oil dipstick

Brake fluid reservoir

Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)

The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the components

mentioned above. These operations are described in the page 219.

Overview

Further explanations, instruc

contained as of page 275

Fig. 201 Diagram for the location of the various elements

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

Technical Specifications280

5 RONa)

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 280 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 PS) without Start&Stop

Engine specifications

Performance

Weights

Trailer weight

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 92 (125)/ 5000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 1500 - 4000

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1390

Fuel Super 98 RON or Super 9

a) With a slight power loss

Maximum speed in km/h 188

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7.2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10.8

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2033

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1488

Gross front axle weight in kg 1010

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1035

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 740

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1300

Technical Specifications 281

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

r 91 RONa)

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 281 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Engine oil capacity

Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (211 PS) Front-wheel drive

Engine specifications

Performance

Weights

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.3 litres

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 155 (211)/ 5300-6200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280/ 1700 - 5200

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1984

Fuel Super 95 RON / Regula

a) With a slight power loss

Maximum speed in km/h 220

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7.7

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2150

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1606

Gross front axle weight in kg 1115

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1055

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Technical Specifications282

91 RONa)

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 282 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (211 PS) All-wheel drive

Engine specifications

Performance

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1650

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 155 (211)/5300-6200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280/ 1700 - 5200

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1984

Fuel Super 95 RON / Regular

a) With a slight power loss

Maximum speed in km/h 218

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5.3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7.6

Technical Specifications 283

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

top

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 283 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Weights

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) DPF with/without Start&S

Engine specifications

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2205

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1661

Gross front axle weight in kg 1140

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1085

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1650

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1650

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 77 (105)/ 4400

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/ 1500 - 2500

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1598

Fuel Min. 51 CN

Technical Specifications284

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 284 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Performance

Weights

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Maximum speed in km/h 177

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8.3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12.6

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2049

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1505

Gross front axle weight in kg 1045

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1035

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 740

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 litres

Technical Specifications 285

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 285 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 103 kW (140 PS) DPF All-wheel drive

Engine specifications

Performance

Weights

Trailer weight

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 103 (140)/ 4200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1968

Fuel Min. 51 CN

Maximum speed in km/h 193

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6.6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10.1

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2187

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1643

Gross front axle weight in kg 1115

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1086

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1650

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1650

Technical Specifications286

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 286 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 125 kW (170 PS) DPF All-wheel drive

Engine specifications

Performance

Weights

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 litres

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 125 (170)/ 4200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350/1750-2500

No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1968

Fuel Min. 51 CN

Maximum speed in km/h 204

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5.9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8.7

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2159

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1615

Gross front axle weight in kg 1115

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1086

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Technical Specifications 287

Safety Fir Technical Specifications

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 287 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

st Operating Instructions Practical Tips

Trailer weight

Engine oil capacity

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1650

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1650

Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 litres

Technical Specifications288

Rear

1519 mm

1527 mm

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 288 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Dimensions and capacities

Dimensions

Length, width 4493 mm/ 1778 mm

Height at kerb weight 1615 mm

Front and rear projection 940 mm/ 977 mm

Wheelbase 2578 mm

Turning circle 10.7

Track width

Front

1534 mm

1542 mm

Capacities

Fuel tank 60 l. Reserve 8l.

Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 3 l/ 5.5 l

Tyre pressure

Summer-grade tyres:

The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.

Winter tyres:

The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.

Index 289

tery

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

re setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

iesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

iesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

ke fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

ke pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

ke pedal

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

ke servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 195

ke system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

kes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Worn brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

king distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

changes

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

defect

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

zer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122, 170

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 289 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Index

A ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

AFS (cornering lights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Air conditioner

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Air conditioner automatic mode

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Air conditioner*

2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Air recirculation mode

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Alarm system

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

All-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Alternator

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Anti-theft alarm

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*

Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . 130

Deactivating anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . 130

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Automatic gearbox

Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox . 175

Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Automatic windscreen wiper/washer . . . . . . . . 126

Auxiliary audio connection: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . 151

B Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Bat

Befo

Biod

Biod

Bon

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bulb

Bulb

Buz

Index290

atic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

atronic

eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

seat covers cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

es hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

partment for on-board documentation . . 140

rol lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

rol lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

rols

lectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

xterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

liding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

enience closing

liding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

enience opening

indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

ant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 227

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

ant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

ant loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

ant temperature

auge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

afety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

ct adjustment of front seat head restraints . .

13

ct adjustment of rear seat head restraints

-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 290 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

C Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Automatic locking system for involuntary

unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Automatic speed dependent locking and un-

locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Selective unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Central locking button

Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Changing gear

See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Changing gear in tiptronic mode . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Changing the bulbs

Main headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Changing the main headlight bulbs

dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Turn signal bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Changing the tail light bulbs

Side light, fog light and tail light on the tailgate

265

Changing the tail lights

Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Turn signal, side and brake lights on the body

264

Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 229

Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 234

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Child seats

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Cigarette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Cleaning alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Clim

Clim

G

Cloc

Cloth

Cloth

Cock

Com

Cont

Cont

Cont

E

E

S

Conv

S

W

Conv

W

Cool

W

Cool

W

Cool

Cool

G

S

Corre

Corre

In

Index 291

t filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

amic cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

amic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 119

nomical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

tric power steering

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

trical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

tronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

tronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 171

tronic Stability Programme . . . . . . . . . 86, 189

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

tronic Stability Programme (ESP)

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

rgency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . 121, 187

rgency manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

rgency opening

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

ssion control system

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

ine

Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

ine compartment

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 219

ine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 291 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Correct sitting position

Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Cruise control*

Turning off the cruise control system . . . . . 186

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

D Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger

seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Daytime lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Deactivating front passenger airbag

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Deactivating the airbag

Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Diesel engine

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Differential lock fault (EDL)

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Display (without warning or information texts) . 60

Disposal

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Doors

Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Drive wheels traction control system . . . . . . . . 188

Driver

See Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Driveshaft differential

XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Driving

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Economically / Environmentally friendly . . 197

With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Driving with an automatic gearbox / DSG automatic

gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Dus

Dyn

Dyn

E Eco

EDL

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Eme

Eme

Eme

Emi

Eng

Eng

Eng

Index292

t seat adjustment

umbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

iesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

etrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

level

dicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

arning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Tank

pening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

tank

ee Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

ral overview of the engine compartment 279

e compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 180

rd warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 292 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Engine fault

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Engine management

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Engine oil pressure

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 85

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Environmental tip

Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Environmentally friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 197

ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 189

See also Electronic Stability Programme . . 169

Example of menu use

Program a speed limit warning . . . . . . . . . . 68

To activate and deactivate the speed limit

warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Example of the use of the menus

Open the Configuration menu with the MFI lever

67

Open the Configuration menu with the steering

wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Examples of menu use

Open the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Open the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

To close the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . 68

Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

F Fabric trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Fire extinguisher* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Flexible service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Folding the seat backrests down . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Folding tray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Front drinks holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Front interior light type 1

Switching light off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Switching light on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Front interior light type 2

Switching light off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Switching light on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 44

Front reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Fron

L

Fuel

D

P

Fuel

In

Fuel

W

Fuel

O

Fuel

S

Fuel:

Fuse

G G 12

Gear

Gene

Glov

Glow

W

GRA

H Hand

W

Haza

Index 293

ks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

gage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

See also Loading the luggage compartment 17

gage compartment net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

n beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 122

n beam headlights

Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

n headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

ntenance

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

ntenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

ual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

ual mode

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

IA-IN connector* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

ors

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

ile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

tifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

ti-purpose mobile storage compartment* . 147

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 293 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Head restraints

Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 135

Adjustment of the head restraint angle . . . 135

Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Headlight flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Headlights

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Heated rear window

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Hill-start aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

How to jump start description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Hydraulic Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

I Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Information in the multifunction display

Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Information messages in the display . . . . . . . . . 65

Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Instrument panel menus

Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Example of menu use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Lights and visibility menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Vehicle status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

J Jack position points

Sill panel trim with cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

K Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

L Leather cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Load compartment in the luggage compartment

See Loading the luggage compartment . . . . 17

Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 17

Loc

Lug

Lug

M Mai

Mai

Mai

Mai

Mai

Man

Man

MED

MFI

Mirr

Mob

Mul

Mul

Index294

shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

window automatic wiper/washer . . . . . . 129

window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

mmended gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

elling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

stration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

ote control key

uttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

ynchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

oving and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

irs

irbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

acement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

ounter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

rse gear

anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

back function

liding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

rack* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

storage compartment* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

er seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

flat tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

ing in

ngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 294 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

N Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

O Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

One-touch opening and closing

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Opening and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 72

Overview

Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

P Paintwork

Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Parking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Passenger

See Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . 11, 12

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 21

Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 205

R Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Radio navigation steering wheel controls

Audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Rain sensor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Rear drink holder*

Armrest* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Rear fog light

Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Rear interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Rear reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Rear

Rear

Rear

Reco

Refu

Regi

Rem

B

S

Rem

Repa

A

Repl

Rev c

Reve

M

Roll-

S

W

Roof

Roof

Roof

Rubb

Run-

Runn

E

S Safe

Index 295

ring wheel audio controls

Audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

ring wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 168

rage area

Centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Other storage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

rage compartment

Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

rage in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . 143

blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

visor

Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

tch

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

tches

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

tching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 295 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Safety instructions

Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Safety notes

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Deactivating front passenger airbag . . . . . . 45

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 136, 138

Seat belt cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Seat belt position

Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Seat belt tensioner

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Selective opening* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Servotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Sitting position

Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate

filter

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Spare wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Starting Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Starting petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 172

After the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . 172

Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Stee

Stee

Sto

Sto

Sto

Sun

Sun

Sun

Swi

Swi

Swi

T Tail

Tail

Index296

cle tools

torage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

cle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

ilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

metric sensor*

ctivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

eactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

ing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

ing lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

ing messages in the display . . . . . . . . . . . 65

ing reports

ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 78

ellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 78

ing symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

ing triangle and first-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . 152

her fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

hing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

hing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 207

r

arning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

r in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 228

r indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

ring suitable shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

el bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

ightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

el trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

els . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 296 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Tank

Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

TCS (Traction control system)

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 22

Tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Traction control system

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Trailer

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Trailer eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Trailer turn signals

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Tyre Mobility System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . . 253

Tyre Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 245

Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Tyre pressure warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 253

Tyres and wheels

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Tyres service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 236

U Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Unlocking and locking

Personalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

V Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Vehicle Maintenance

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Vehicle paintwork

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 205

Vehi

S

Vehi

Vent

Volu

A

D

W Warn

Warn

Warn

Warn

R

Y

Warn

Warn

Was

Was

Was

Wate

W

Wate

Wea

Wea

Whe

T

Whe

Whe

Index 297

altea freetrack EN.book Seite 297 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12

Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 30

Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted?

13

Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 21, 30

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Windscreen interval wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Windscreen washer fluid

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Windscreen wiper blades

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Changing the rear wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . 231

Winter driving

Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 219

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omis- sion, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.09.10

Vehicle data

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1. Vehicle identification number

2. Identification numbers

Type/Model/Engine

Gearbox/Finishes

3. Identification letters

Engine/Gearbox/Paintwork

Equipment

4. Identification codes of variable equipment

5. Consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 Emissions (g/km) urban

Consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 Emissions (g/km) motorway

Consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 Emissions (g/km) mixed

Note

We recommend that you visit an Authorised SEAT Service Centre when- ever you require any work done on your vehicle.

SEAT regularly communicates to its Authorised Service Centres new product developments. They have tools and highly specialized person- nel who can guarantee the safety and performance of your vehicle.

Scrupulously following the General Programme for Inspection Services in Authorised SEAT Service Centres will ensure you maintain greater value for your vehicle.

Portada PM_interior.qxd:Interior Manual TOLEDO 26/7/10 15:57 Pgina 3

A LT

EA F

R EE

TR AC

K O <

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Altea Freetrack Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Altea Freetrack as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Altea Freetrack. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.